Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCAG 25-257 Vol 1 - Renton Legacy Square Phase 2PROJECT MANUAL OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VOLUME 1 OF 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 510 South 3rd Street Renton, WA 98057 PROJECT NO. CAG-25-257 CITY OF RENTON 1055 SOUTH GRADY WAY RENTON, WASHINGTON 98057 Armondo Pavone, Mayor PERMIT/ BID SET September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 00 10 - SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1 OF 2 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 10 Specifications Table of Contents 0001 07 Seals Page 0011 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 20 00 Bidder's Qualification Statement 0021 00 Instructions to Bidders 00 23 00 Supplementary Instructions 0031 32 Information Available to Bidders 00 42 10 Bid Submittal Checklist 00 52 00 Standard Form of Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplemental Conditions 00 80 00 Forms Form A Bid Form Form B Proposal Bid Bond Form C List of Subcontractors Form D Contractor Qualifications/ Evaluation Form E Qualifications of Project Key Personnel Form F Contract Bond Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 Summary of Work 01 11 30 Hazardous Materials 01 1400 Work Restrictions 01 2000 Payment Procedures 01 21 00 Prevailing Wage Rates 01 3000 Administrative Requirements 01 3216 Construction Schedule 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 4010.10 Product Substitution Request Form 01 4200 Definitions 01 4343 Special Inspections 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 01 7400 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 7800 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 0241 00 Site Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing DIVISION 04 - MASONRY - Not Used - DIVISION 05 - METAL 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 17 19 Cross -Laminated Timber 06 18 11 Glued -Laminated Timber Framing 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 0711 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 19 00 Water Repellents 0721 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 0741 13.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panels 0742 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 0831 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 35 13 Folding Doors 0871 00 Door Hardware SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 0921 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 22 16 Non -Structural Metal Framing 09 30 00 Tiling 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 90 00 Painting and Coating DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 10 14 23 Panel Signage 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 10 28 00 Restroom Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT - Not Used - DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - Not Used - DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Not Used - DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT - Not Used - PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2 OF 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 00 00 10 Specifications Table of Contents DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 00 00 General Plumbing Requirements 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 2211 16 Domestic Water Piping and Fittings 2211 19 Domestic water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 22 33 00 Electric, Domestic -Water Heaters 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND COOLING 23 00 00 General Mechanical Requirements 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 2331 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Fans 2381 26 Split -System Air -Conditioners 23 82 39.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 General Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Short Circuit, Coordination and Arc Flash Studies 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 13 Electricity Metering 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2651 13 Architectural Luminaires, Sources and Components 2651 19 LED Interior Lighting 26 56 19 LED Exterior Lighting 26 70 00 Electrical Infrastructure for Audiovisual Systems DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 2741 16 Integrated Audiovisual Systems and Equipment SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON DIVISION 28 - ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY - NOT USED - DIVISION 31 - EARTHW K 31 0000 Earthwork 31 1000 Site Preparation 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 2323.00 Fill and Backfill 31 2323.15 Trench Backfill DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1000 Paving 3231 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 3291 13 Soil Preparation 32 93 00 Plants DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 11 00 W ter Utility Distribution 3331 00 Sanitary Sewer Utility 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utility SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET APPENDICES Appendix A City of Renton Certificate of Insurance Guidelines Appendix B Geotechnical Site Assessment Appendix C Interlocal Agreement with Seattle Public Utility (SPU) Appendix D W rld Cup Legacy Square - Phase 1 Civil Construction Plans (for Reference Only) Appendix E Unused Appendix F Record Drawings for Utilities Within SPU Property Appendix G Permits Appendix H Unused Appendix I Archaeological Monitoring for the Renton Downtown Utility Improvements Project (Report Covers Project Area and Depth) Appendix J Luminaire Schedule Appendix K Light Fixture Product Data Sheets Appendix L Plumbing Fixture Product Data Sheets END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE OWNER CITY OF RENTON 1055 S GRADY WAY RENTON, WA 98057 (425) 430-7436 CONTACT: PAUL HINTZ EMAIL: phintz rentonwa.gov ARCHITECT Mithun 1201 Alaskan Way Ste 200 SEATTLE, WA 98101 (206) 623-3344 CONTACT: CRYSTAL LOYA EMAIL: crystall@mithun.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER KPFF 1601 5TH AVE, SUITE 1600 SEATTLE, WA 98101 (206) 622-5822 CONTACT: IIM SWENSON EMAIL: iim.swenson@kpff.com ELECTRICAL ENGINEER P2S INC 1201 3RD AVE, SUITE 3500 SEATTLE, WA 98101 206.267.6963 CONTACT: PETER SLOANE EMAIL: PETER.SLOANE0bP2SINC.COM MECHANICAL ENGINEER P2S INC 1201 3RD AVE, SUITE 3500 SEATTLE, WA 98101 206.267.6963 CONTACT: PETER SLOANE EMAIL: PETER.SLOANE(o)P2SINC.COM SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SEALS PAGE 0001 07 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PLUMBING ENGINEER P2S INC 1201 3RD AVE, SUITE 3500 SEATTLE, WA 98101 206.267.6963 CONTACT: PETER SLOANE EMAIL: PETER.SLOANECc)P2SINC.COM SURVEYOR CITY OF RENTON 1055 S GRADY WAY RENTON, WA 98057 425-430-7436 CONTACT: JUSTIN JOHNSON EMAIL: JTJOHNSONCa>RENTONWA.GOV STRUCTURAL ENGINEER KPFF 1601 FIFTH AVENUE, SUITE 1600 SEATTLE, WA 98101 206.926.0560 CONTACT: JIM SWENSON EMAIL: JIM.SWENSON@KPFF.COM AV CONSULTANT LSTN SEATTLE, WA 98144 646.578.1566 CONTACT: DENIS BLOUNT EMAIL: DEN IS@LSTNCONSULTANTS.COM LIGHTING CONSULTANT HLB SEATTLE, WA 425.600.4902 CONTACT: KEVIN FRARY EMAIL: KFRARY0 HLBLIGHTING.COM END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SEALS PAGE 0001 07 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 0011 13-ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project: TITLE: ESTIMATED BASE BID COST: PRE -BID CONFERENCE Legacy Square - Phase 2 $1,504, 367 excluding WSST. 8:30 A.M. on September 16, 2025, via ZOOM Attendance at the pre -bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. Public Pre -Bid Conference Zoom Information: - Click or use this link to join the Legacy Square - Phase 2 Pre -Bid Zoom Conference: https://us06web.zoom.us/o/83554023730?pwd=82USkio6pQkivtinbl RaoQbG5L2GRw.1 Meeting ID: 835 5402 3730 Passcode: 749769 One tap mobile: +12532050468„83554023730#,,,,*749769# US +12532158782„83554023730#,,,,*749769# US (Tacoma BID SUBMITTAL Bids are to be submitted no later than TIME/DATE/LOCATION: 2:00 P.M. on September23, 2025 Bids must be hand delivered to: Office of the City Clerk Lobby, Renton City Hall 1055 S. Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 PUBLIC BID OPENING: Approximately 3:00 P.M. on September 23, 2025 via ZOOM Public Bid Opening Zoom Information: - Click or use this link to join the Legacy Square - Phase 2 Bid Zoom Conference: https://us06web.zoom.us/i/86072759502?pwd=JmpGNT85aJBm6ppH N3A2p8lisFdaiv.1 Meeting ID: 860 7275 9502 Passcode: 341207 One tap mobile: +12532050468„86072759502#,,,,*341207# US +12532158782„86072759502#,,,,*341207# US (Tacoma The work shall be substantially completed from the date of commencement under this contract but shall not exceed a Substantial Completion date of March 20, 2026. The scope of work includes, but is not be limited to: Construction of a fully enclosed, freestanding stage with audio and visual components installed and operational; installation of a bathroom; and all related work. In addition, ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 0011 13 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET the work includes installation of electrical systems for Legacy Square - Phase 1 (park site improvements) and Phase 2 (stage). Bid documents will be available September 8, 2025. Plans and specifications may be viewed on the City of Renton website via the following link City of Renton - Bids and at Builder's Exchange of Washington Free -of -charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors (collectively, "Bidders") by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects," "Public Works," and "City of Renton." This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online documents with the ability to: download, view, print, order full/partial plan sets from numerous reprographic sources, and a free online digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders "Register" in order to receive automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the "Self -Registered Bidders List." Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically check the on-line plan room for addenda issued on this project. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303 should you require assistance with access or registration. Published: Daily Journal of Commerce on September 8, 2025: POB 11050, Seattle, WA 98111. Phone: 206.622.8272. Website: plancenter.com Contact Information: Please direct questions regarding this project to Paul Hintz at phintz@rentonwa.gov. Document clarification questions must be submitted via email and must be received no later than 4:00 P.M. on September 16, 2025. Additional Project Information: The City's fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the most recent prevailing wage rates. The "Effective Date" for this project is the Bid Submittal date set forth above. The applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor & Industries website located at https://Ini.wa.gov/ticensing-permits/public-works-projects/prevailing-wage-rates/. A Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the total amount of the bid must accompany each bid. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities or irregularities in bids received. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. Bids must be placed in a sealed envelope marked: LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2. Sealed bids for this proposal will be received by the City of Renton at the lobby of Renton City Hall, until the time and date specified in the Call for Bids. No mailed, Fedex, or UPS delivered bids will be accepted. The bids will be publicly opened and read via a Zoom video-conferencing 60 minutes after the bid closing, after which the bids will be considered and the award made as early as practicable. ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 0011 13 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET No proposal may be changed or withdrawn after the time set for receiving bids. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms attached hereto. THE CITY OF RENTON Jason Seth, City Clerk Published: Daily Journal of Commerce on September 8, 2025 Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises: September 8, 2025 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 0011 13 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 20 00 — BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Each Bidder submitting a Bid on Work included in these Contract Documents shall provide as part of this Bid, the following information. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Business Address: 3. Telephone: 4. How many years has said Bidder been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name? 5. Contracts now in hand (gross amount): $ 6. Experience with similar projects: In Form D (Contractor Qualifications, Evaluation), list at least three (3) projects accomplished within the last five (5) years in which the Bidder constructed comparable projects of similar scope of Work and value. Include the name, telephone number and email address of the Owner or Owner's Representative responsible for the project. Describe how the project met customer satisfaction. The City of Renton will discuss performance with the named references. 7. Work Plan: Provide a Gantt chart or comparable of how the Work will be done within the Contract Time window allowed. Include a schedule of activities planned. 8. Assigned Key Personnel: Provide a resume for the Project Manager, Superintendent, Foreman, and other key personnel that will be assigned and committed to this Project and complete Form E (Qualifications of Key Personnel). 9. List of company's major equipment. PART 2 — NOT USED. PART 3 — NOT USED. END OF SECTION BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 00 20 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 21 00 — INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 — GENERAL SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET General - All terms, conditions, requirements and definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.1 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS A. Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing via email to the Owner or the Owner's agent seven (7) calendar days before the bid due date. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective Bidder concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective Bidders by addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders. B. In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW the City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms certified by the Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (OMWBE). Participation may be either on a direct basis in response to this invitation or as a subcontractor to a Bidder. However, unless required by federal statutes, regulations, grants, or contract terms referenced in the Contract Documents, no preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of MWBE participation shall be required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or considered nonresponsive on that basis. Any affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes included or referenced in the Contract Documents will apply. C. The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by (a) Veteran - owned businesses (defined in RCW 43.60.010), list located at http://www.dva.wa.gov/program/certified-veteran-and-servicemember-owned- businesses, and (b) Small, Mini and Micro businesses (defined in RCW 39.26.010) which have registered in WEBS at https://fortress.wa.gov/ga/webs/. D. N/A 1.2 PREPARATION OF BIDS —CONSTRUCTION A. Bids must be: (1) submitted on the Bid Form, or copies of the form, furnished by the Owner or the Owner's agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a Bid must initial each change appearing on any Bid Form. If the Bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the corporation's authorized designee. The address of the Bidder shall be typed or printed in ink on the Bid Form in the space provided. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00-1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. The Bid Form may require Bidders to submit Bid prices for one or more items on various bases, including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate prices; (3) unit prices; or (4) any combination of items 1 through 3 above. C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items all requested Alternates must be bid. The Owner reserves the right, but is not obligated, to reject any Bid on which all requested Alternates are not bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required for an Alternate, enter "No Change." If there is no entry, it will be presumed that the Bidder has made no offer to accomplish this Alternate. D. Substitute bid forms will not be considered unless this solicitation expressly authorizes their submission. E. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by an authorized representative of the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no conditions or stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify its Bid in any other manner. F. Where so indicated by the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures; in case of discrepancy between the two, and notwithstanding any language to the contrary in the Bid Form, the amount written in figures shall govern, but words may be used to help resolve any ambiguity in the figure. Portions of the Bid Form may require the addition of components to a total or the identification of component amounts within a total. In case of discrepancy between component amounts listed and their sum(s), the total amount listed shall govern, unless explicitly instructed otherwise on the Bid Form. 1.3 BID GUARANTEE A. A Bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the Base Bid amount is required. The Bid Security constitutes a pledge that the Bidder will enter into the Contract with the Owner in the form provided, in a timely manner, and on the terms stated in its Bid and will furnish in a timely manner the payment and performance bonds, certificates of insurance, Contractor's Construction Schedule, and all other documents required in the Contract Documents. Should the Bidder fail or refuse to enter into the Contract or fail to furnish such documents, the amount of the Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. By submitting its Bid, each Bidder agrees that any forfeiture of the Bid Security is a reasonable prediction at the time of Bid submittal of future damages to the Owner. Failure of the Bidder to provide bid guarantee when required shall render the Bid non -responsive. B. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond (Form B) or postal money order, or certified check or cashier's check made payable to the City of Renton Treasurer. The Attorney -in -Fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall be licensed to do business in the State of Washington and shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of his or her Power of Attorney. C. The Owner will return Bid guarantees (other than Bid bond) to unsuccessful Bidders INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET as soon as practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with the successful Bidder. The successful Bidder's bid guarantee will be returned to the successful Bidder with its official notice to proceed with the Work of the Contract. D. The Bidder will allow 60 calendar days from Bid opening date for acceptance of its Bid by the Owner. E. The Bidder will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond waiver within 15 calendar days after receipt of the Contract. If the apparent successful Bidder fails to sign all contractual documents or provide the bond and insurance as required or fails to return the documents within 15 calendar days after receipt of the Contract, the Owner may terminate the award of the Contract. In the event a Bidder discovers an error in its Bid following the Bid Opening, the Bidder may request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions: Written notification of the claimed error and request to withdraw the Bid is received by the Owner within 24 hours following Bid Opening. 2. The Bidder provides written, detailed documentation of the claimed error to the satisfaction of the Owner within 72 hours following the Bid Opening. The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the Bid in writing. If the Bidder's request for withdrawal of its Bid is approved, the Bidder will be released from further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain the Bidder's Bid guarantee. 1.4 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS A. The low Bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive Bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the Base Bid item, plus additive Bid alternates selected by the Owner, and within funds available for the Project. B. The Bidder agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for sixty (60) calendar days from date of bid opening. C. All items on bid from must include pricing or bid will be considered non -responsive. 1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in the Bid being declared non -responsive. 1.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK The Bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET local conditions which can affect the Work or its cost, including but not limited to; (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminaryto and duringthe Work. The Bidder also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this Contract. Any failure of the Bidder to fully acquaint itself with any applicable condition or matter will not in any way relieve the Bidder from the responsibility for performing the Work in accordance with, and for the Contract Sum and within the Contract Time provided for in, the proposed Contract Documents. 1.7 BID AMOUNTS A. The Bid prices shown for each item on the Bid Form (including Alternates, if any) shall include all labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the Work for that item. B. The Owner will obtain and pay for Building permits for this Project prior to Project Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all and other regulatory permits as required. C. The Bidder agrees to hold the Base Bid prices for sixty (60) calendar days from date of Bid Opening. 1.8 TAXES All bid amounts shall exclude Washington Sales Tax (WSST) based on the City of Renton rate (currently 10.3%) entered on the appropriate location on the Bid Form. All other taxes imposed by law shall be included in the bid amount. The Owner will include WSST in progress payments. The Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and shall furnish proof of payment to the Owner if requested. [NOTE: Contractor must provide its bond for Contract amount plus the WSST.] 1.9 SUBMISSION OF BIDS A. Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids. B. Potential Listing of Subcontractors: In accordance with RCW 39.30.060, if the Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more, the Bidder shall complete and submit a Subcontractor list to the Owner by time of Bid Submission in the same manner specified for receipt of Bids. In these circumstances, the Bidder must name the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Subcontractor or Subcontractors with whom the Bidder, if awarded the Contract, will subcontract directly (i.e., not lower -tier Subcontractors) for performance of the Work of: HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) Work, b. Plumbing as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, C. Electrical as described in Chapter 19.28 RCW, d. Structural steel installation; e. Rebar installation; and f. Any other categories of Work listed on the Subcontractor listing form and/or Bid Form that are in addition to the categories of Work listed for compliance with RCW 39.30.060. 2. The listing of HVAC, plumbing, and electrical subcontractors shall occur within one (1) hour of Bid Submission. The listing of structural steel installation and rebar installation subcontractors shall occur within forty-eight (48) hours of Bid Submission. The listing of any other categories of Work listed on the Subcontractor listing form(s) and/or Bid Form, if any, shall occur as indicated on such forms or as otherwise described in the Bidding Documents. 3. If the Bidder intends to self -perform any of these categories of Work, it must name itself for each such category 4. The Bidder shall not list more than one (1) entity for a particular category of Work identified, unless a Subcontractor varies with an Alternate Bid, in which case the Bidder shall identify the Subcontractor to be used for the Alternate and the affected portion of the Work and otherwise make its Bid clear as to which Subcontractor shall be utilized depending upon the selection of alternates. 5. In accordance with RCW 39.30.060, failure of a Bidder to submit as part of the Bid the names of such proposed HVAC, plumbing, electrical, structural steel installation, and rebar installation Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such Work or the naming of two or more Subcontractors to perform the same Work shall render the Bid non -responsive and, therefore, void. 6. The Bidder, if Awarded the Contract, will subcontract with the listed Subcontractors for performance of the portions of the Work designated on the Bid Form, subject to the provisions of the Contract and RCW 39.30.060. The Bidder shall not substitute a listed Subcontractor in furtherance of bid shopping or bid peddling. 7. All listed Subcontractors may be required to provide evidence of their qualifications prior to the award, or at any time during the performance of the Contract. This evidence shall demonstrate that the Subcontractor meets or exceeds all requirements for experience, qualifications, manufacturer's INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET certifications, or any other requirements specified in any of the technical sections of the Contract Documents for which the Subcontractor proposes to perform Work. 8. If a listed Subcontractor fails to provide adequate evidence of its bondability, qualification, or other requirements of the Contract or Bidding Documents (including without limitation a finding of Subcontractor non -Responsibility), the Owner may require the Bidder to replace the Subcontractor with a Subcontractor acceptable to the Owner at no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. C. The Bid Form shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the outside: The Project number and description; 2. The name and address of the Bidder, and 3. Identification as "SEALED BID INCLOSED". D. Prior to the Bid Opening, the Owner's representative will designate the official bid clock. Any part of the Bid Form, or in the rare situation of a bid modification, not received prior to the times specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the Bid will be returned to the Bidder unopened. E. A Bid may be withdrawn in person by a Bidder's authorized representative before the opening of the Bids. Bidder(s) representative will be required to show ID and sign on bid summary sheet before it will be released. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign Language interpreters, braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled Bid Opening. 1.10 BID RESULTS After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain Bid results from the Owner. 1.11 LOW RESPONSIBLE BIDDER A. Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, the Lowest responsive Bidder must meetthe following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350 (1) to be considered a responsible Bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The lowest responsible Bidder must: At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW; INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON Have a current state unified business identifier number; SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder's employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW; 4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3); 5. N/A 6. Have received training on public works and prevailing wage requirements under Chapters 39.04 and 39.12 RCW, or be exempt from such training requirements if the Bidder has completed three (3) or more public works projects and has had a valid business license in Washington for three (3) or more years prior to Bid Submission; and 7. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civiljudgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. (Before award of a public works contract, a Bidder shall submit to the Owner a signed statement in accordance with RCW 9A.72.085 verifying under penalty of perjury that the Bidder is in compliance with the responsible bidder criteria requirements. An Onwer may award a Contract in reasonable reliance upon such a sworn statement.) B. Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory responsible biddercriteria, the Owner has adopted relevant supplemental criteria for determining Bidder responsibility which the Bidder must meet (RCW 39.04.350 (3)). The apparent Low Bidder shall complywith the following: At least seven (7) days prior to the Bid Submittal deadline, a potential Bidder may request that the Owner modifythe supplemental responsibility criteria. The Owner will evaluate the information submitted by the potential Bidder and respond before the Bid Submittal deadline. If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an addendum to the Bidding Documents identifying the new criteria. 2. Upon Owner's request, the apparent low Bidder must supply the requested responsibility information within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or failure to submit all the information requested INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET within the time provided may render the Bid non -responsive 3. If the Owner determines that the apparent low Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will notify the Bidder of its preliminary determination in writing. 4. Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the Bidder may withdraw its bid or request a hearing where the Bidder may appeal the preliminary determination and present additional information to the Owner. 5. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the Bidder's request. 6. The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the hearing. 7. If the Owner determines a Bidder to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing, the reasons for the determination. If the Final Determination affirms that the Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will not execute a Contract with any other Bidder until two (2) business days after the Bidder determined to be not responsible has received the Final Determination. 8. The Owner's Final Determination is specific to this Project and will have no effect on other or future projects. 1.12 CONTRACTAWARD A. The Owner intends (but is not bound) to award a Contract to the lowest responsive Bid, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will evaluate bid responsiveness and responsibility. The Owner has the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in its judgment, is in its own best interests. A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements: a. It is received at the proper time and place. b. It meets the stated requirements of the Bid Form. c. It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the state of Washington at the time of bid opening and is not banned from bidding by the Department of Labor and Industries. d. It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, if required. 2. A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents, including but not limited to: meeting mandatory responsibility criteria and supplemental responsibility criteria established for the Project. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. The apparent low Bidder, for purpose of award, shall be the responsive and responsible Bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the Base Bid plus selected additive or deductive bid alternates and meeting all other Bid Submittal requirements. END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0021 00 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 23 00 —SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. The City's fair practices and non-discrimination policies, and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this Project. B. Unless otherwise set forth in the Contract Documents, the Notice to Proceed for the Project shall be given after the City Council, City Attorney, and Risk Manager approves the Contract, and the Contract is signed by the Mayor. C. Upon Notification of Intent to Award Contract, the following documents (on forms provided by or approved by the City) must be submitted by the Contractor prior to commencement of the Work, and not later than five (5) business days after receipt of the City's Notification of Intent to Award Contract. 1. Standard Form of Agreement 2. Bond To the City of Renton 3. City of Renton Business License 4. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 5. Certificate of Liability Insurance; naming the City of Renton as additionally insured. 6. Project Schedule & Time of Completion 1.2 BIDDER SELECTION CRITERIA A. The City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive informalities or irregularities in Bids received. END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS 00 23 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 3132 — INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. This section contains information on reports pertaining to the project building and site. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 1.2 AVAILABLE INFORMATION A. Owner has information consisting of reports and other record information. This information is available to Contractor and subcontractors for review. Available information includes but is not limited to: 1. City of Renton Certificate of Insurance Guidelines. Attached as Appendix A. 2. Geotechnical Report: A Geotechnical Report titled "Subsurface Exploration, Geologic Hazards, And Geotechnical Engineering Report", dated May 21, 2025, was prepared by Associated Earth Sciences, Kirkland, Washington. Attached as Appendix B. 3. Interlocal Agreement with Seattle Public Utility (SPU). Attached as Appendix C. 4. World Cup Legacy Square — Phase 1 Civil Construction Plans (for reference only). Attached as Appendix D 5. Appendix E — N/A 6. Record Drawings for Utilities Within SPU Property. Attached as Appendix F 7. Permits. Attached as Appendix G. 8. Appendix H — N/A 9. Archaeological Monitoring for the Renton Downtown Utility Improvement Project (Report Covers Project Area and Depth). Attached as Appendix I. B. Reports will be made available by contacting the Office of the Architect or Owner. C. Surveys, reports and record information on existing conditions are provided without warranty as to their accuracy or completeness. D. Surveys, reports and record information on existing conditions are not part of the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 0031 32 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 42 10 — BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST PART 1 — GENERAL SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.1. FORMS BELOW MUST BE TIMELY SUBMITTED FOR A BID TO BE CONSIDERED RESPONSIVE: A. FORM A— BID FORM, (includes Attachment 1: NON -COLLUSION, ANTI-TRUST AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT) B. FORM B - PROPOSAL BID BOND C. FORM C - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (SUBMISSION OF HVAC, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, STRUCTURAL STEEL, AND REBAR SUBCONTRACTORS) — REQUIRED IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000 D. FORM D — CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION E. FORM E— QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT KEY PERSONNEL F. FORM F—CONTRACT BOND FORM 1.2. CONFIRM ITEMS BELOW ARE COMPLETE AT TIME OF BID SUBMISSION: A. Have you included costs for Base Bid, and each of the Alternates as listed on the Bid Form? B. Do written amounts in the Bid Form agree with amounts shown in figures? C. Have you certified receipt of addenda? D. Has the Bid Form been properly signed including Attachment? E. Have you completed the Deposit or Contract Bond Form? F. Has a Bid Bond or certified check been enclosed with your Bid? G. Is the amount of the Bid Bond at least 5% of the total amount of the Base Bid amount? H. Are Forms A (Bid Form. including Attachment) and B (Proposed Bid Bond) listed above included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope? 1.3. FORMS REQUIRED AT TIME OF BID SUBMISSION IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000: A. Form To Be Completed at time of Bid Submission: 1. Form C — List of Subcontractors (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural Steel, and Rebar Subcontractors) BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00 42 10 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.4. FORMS TO BE COMPLETED BY APPARENT LOW BIDDER WITHIN 2 BUSINESS DAYS OF NOTICE BY OWNER OF APPARENT LOW BID: A. Form D —Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation B. Form E — Qualifications of Key Personnel END OF SECTION BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00 42 10 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SECTION 00 52 00 - STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT CITY OF RENTON BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 00 52 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SAMPLE AGREEMENT SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET CONTRACT NO. 25-257 THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of [Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "City" and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." Now, therefore the parties agree as follows: Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as prepared by [Insert Name of Entity Preparing Documents], dated [Insert Documents Date] is fully set forth herein: Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Addenda, Proposal Form, Special Provisions, Contract Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor's Proposal and all documents submitted therewith in response to the City's Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents of the Standard Specifications, as revised by the Amendments and Special Provisions included with the City's Call for Bids and Contract Documents. 2. Project. Contractor shall complete all Work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the Project entitled [Insert Project Name], [Insert Contract #], including all changes to the Work and force account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices (in any), and by force account as specified in the Proposal accordingto the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment of a Contract Sum not to exceed $ , unless modified by an approved Change Order or addendum and in accordance with the Contract terms. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for the Work, allowable markups on the Work, and the Contractor's overhead and profit for the Work. 4. Substantial Completion Date. Contract Time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Documents. If Substantial Completion under this Agreement is not achieved within the Contract Time, Contractor shall pay liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract Documents. S. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees. 6. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. 7. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 00 52 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused this Agreement to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set its hand and seal the day and year first above - written. CONSTRACTOR: President/Partner/Owner Secretary d/b/a [Enter Firm name] CHECK ONE: CITY OF RENTON: Armondo Pavone, Mayor ATTEST Jason Seth, City Clerk FIRM INFORMATION ❑ Limited Liability Company ❑ Partnership ❑ Corporation STATE OF INCORPORATION: [Enter state of incorporation] CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: [Address Line 1] [Address Line 2] [City, State and Zip] [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] CITY CONTACT INFORMATION: City of Renton 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] Attention: If business is a CORPORATION, the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by- laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. If the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as) and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract. If the business is an limited Liability Company, an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her title. Contract Template Updated 12/29/2017- modified May 3, 2022 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 00 52 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 72 00 — GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1. DEFINITIONS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. "Application for Payment" means a written request submitted by Contractor to Owner for payment of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values, supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E may require. B. "Architect," "Engineer," or "A/E" means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority. C. "Allowance" is an amount included in the Contract Sum for a stated part of the Work that is not fully defined and/or quantified at the time the Contract Sum is established. When that part of the Work is adequately defined and/or quantified, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to account for the difference between the Allowance and the actual cost of the item. Following the adjustment, that part of the Work will no longer be an Allowance item. D. "Change Order" means a written instrument signed by Owner and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. E. "Claim" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof or requesting an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time, as more fully set forth in Part 8. F. "Construction Change Directive" ("CCD") is a written order prepared by Owner that directs Work prior to total agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. G. "Contract for Construction" (also referred to as the "Contract") is the agreement between Owner and Contractor and is formed by the Contract Documents. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between Owner and Contractor and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. H. "Contract Award Amount" is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates. "Contract Documents" means the General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Agreement, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and modifications thereof. "Contract Sum" is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Work, except Washington State sales tax. K. "Contract Time" is the number of Days or other time period allotted in the Contract Documents from the Notice to Proceed for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. "Contractor" means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. M. "Day(s): Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendar day(s)." N. "Drawings" are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. O. "Field Work Directive" or Field Authorization" means an instruction in the field used to address immediate or unforeseen changes in the work, enabling the contractor to proceed without requiring a formal Contract Change Order. P. "Final Acceptance" means the written acceptance of the Work by Owner, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9.13. Q. "Final Completion" means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9.A. R. "Force Majeure" means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3.5.A. S. "Notice" means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice. T. "Notice to Proceed" means a written Notice from Owner to Contractor that permits construction on site to commence upon specified terms and defines the date on which the Contract Time begins. U. "Owner" means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative, which has the authority to enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner may designate in writing a Representative who shall have authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. The A/E, if any, does not have such authority. V. "Person" means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or individual. W. "Prior Occupancy" means Owner's use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.8 A. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET X. "Progress Schedule" means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further set forth in Section 3.2. Y. "Project" means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors. Z. "Project Record" means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in paragraph 4.2A. AA. "Schedule of Values" means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of Work, in such detail and format as requested by Owner. BB. "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. CC. "Subcontract" means a contract between Contractor and a Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, work, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work. DD. "Subcontractor" means any Person of any tier, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the Work. EE. "Substantial Completion" means that stage in the progress of the Work (or portion of the Work designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that Owner can fully occupy or utilize the Work (or portion designated by Owner) for its intended use, as more fully set forth in Section 6.7. There may be separate dates of Substantial Completion specified in the Contract Documents for various phases or portions of the Work. FF. "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes, but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in the following order, with a revision to a Contract Document having precedence over the original document and a later document having precedence over an earlier document: A. Signed Agreement, with any Change Orders having precedence. B. Supplemental Conditions. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON C. Modifications to the General Conditions. D. General Conditions. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET E. Specifications and Drawings. The Specifications and Drawings are complementary and shall have equal precedence. Thus, anything mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. If there is any inconsistency between the Specifications and Drawings, Contractor will make an inquiry to Owner to determine how to proceed. Unless otherwise directed, Contractor will provide the better quality or greater quantity of any Work or materials, as reasonably interpreted by Owner, at no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. In case of conflict within the Specifications, provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over provisions of any other Division. F. In case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale Drawings. G. City of Renton Standard Plans H. WSDOT Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction as amended by the American Public Works Association (APWA). 1.3. EXECUTION AND INTENT A. Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner: Contract Sum and Contract Time are reasonable and adequate: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract Documents; 2. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof; 3. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform Contractor's obligations required by the Contract Documents; and 4. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work and GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET perform the obligations required by the Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so. PART 2 — INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1. CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner that such insurance has been procured, including but not limited to (1) Certificates of Insurance, on forms that are binding on insurers, (2) the actual costs (expressed as a percentage) of Contractor's liability insurance under Section 2.1.13.1 below, (3) endorsements, including endorsements for additional insureds as listed in Section 2.1.E below, (4) evidence of State Workers' Compensation coverage, and (5) a copy of any builder's risk policy required by the Contract Documents. All policies, endorsements and certificates must be signed copies and shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies cannot be materially altered (i.e. the coverages reduced, the limits decreased or the additional insured removed) allowed to expire, or cancelled without first giving forty- five (45) days prior written Notice to Owner. Contractor shall furnish to Owner copies of any subsequently issued endorsements amending, modifying, altering or restricting coverage limits. Review of Contractor's insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by this Part 2 shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the cost of all insurance and bond costs required for the Work. Insurance carriers providing insurance shall be acceptable to Owner. B. Term of insurance coverage: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years. Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any corrective Work required by Section 5.16. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an Occurrence Form, including personal injury, bodily injury and property damage liability on Contractor's operations, including Subcontractors; on Work Contractor may subcontract or sublet to others; and on the indemnity provisions of this Contract. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to: a. Personal injury; b. Blanket contractual liability; C. Completed operations/products liability; d. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed; and e. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET The policy shall be purchased from a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the State of Washington possessing an A.M. Best's policyholder's rating of A or better and a financial rating of no less than XI. This insurance will include a severability of interest (cross liability clause) for Work performed under this Contract. Contractor's policy shall be designated primary coverage for both defense and indemnity, and any Owner's policies excess and non-contributory. 2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance: Required if owned, non -owned, and hired vehicle will be used in performance of Work or delivery of products by the Contractor, beyond normal commutes. 3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architectural, engineering, surveying, legal, or medical) are being provided to the Owner and if those professional services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if coverage is maintained at least 3-years beyond Substantial Completion of the Work. 4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability coverage limits. 5. Builders Risk — When applicable to the Work being performed, is required up to the amount of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance provisions. See section 2.6. 6. Pollution Liability— Required if Work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage may be included in other required policies. C. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers' Compensations Contractor shall comply with the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Act and the Jones Act. D. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by Contractor or any Subcontractor. E. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton, its administrators, officers, representatives, and employees, and any required governmental agencies as Primary and Non-contributory Additional Insureds on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability, Excess/Umbrella, when applicable). All insurance certificates and endorsements shall evidence such additional insureds. F. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk Manager or with Risk Manager approval. G. Subcontractor Coverage. Contractor shall ensure and require that Subcontractors have insurance coverage to cover bodily injury and property damage on all operations and all vehicles owned or operated by Subcontractors. Subcontractors shall name Contractor and Owner, any required governmental agencies, and others designated GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET in the Contract Documents as well as their officers and employees, as additional insureds and give at least 30 Days' Notice of cancellation. Notice of cancellation shall be sent to the Owner within two business days following receipt of notice. 2.2. COVERAGE LIMITS Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be not less than the amounts specified in the Agreement; if limits are not specified in the Agreement, coverage limits shall be not less than as follows for applicable required insurance: A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each Accident or Loss. C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability. D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability. E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or Limits are adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities. Owner's review, specification or approval of the insurance in this Contract or of its coverage or amount shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor under the Contract Documents or otherwise. Coverages are the minimum to be provided and are not limitations of liability under the Contract, indemnification, or applicable law provisions. Contractor may, at its expense, purchase larger coverage amounts. Contractor's policy shall be designated primary coverage for both defense and indemnity, and any Owner's policies excess. 2.3. INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance coverage and additional insured endorsements. B. List Project info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder and a Primary and Non-contributory Additional Insured on the policy (Additional Insured does not apply to Professional Liability and Workers' Compensation). The certificate holder should read: City of Renton ATTN: Paul Hintz 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON policy holder. 2.4. PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount, plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders, increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or more. Pursuant to RCW 39.08.010 (3) the Contractor may choose in lieu of the bond, retain ten percent (10 retainage instead of 5% retainage) of the contract amount for a period of thirty days after date of final acceptance, or until receipt of all necessary releases from the department of revenue, the employment security department, and the department of labor and industries and settlement of any liens filed under chapter 60.28 RCW, whichever is later. The recovery of unpaid wages and benefits must be the first priority for any actions filed against retainage held by the Owner/City. 2.5. ALTERNATIVE SURETY When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance bonds from an alternative surety if: A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety; or A. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required byOwner. 2.6. BUILDER'S RISK A. Builders Risk Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. For projects not involving New Building Construction, an "Installation Floater" is an acceptable substitute for the Builder's Risk Insurance. The insurance shall cover the interests of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear. B. Losses covered: Builder's Risk Insurance shall be placed on an "all risk" basis or equivalent policy form and insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, flood, wind, temporary buildings, debris removal including demolition, and shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E's services and expenses required as a result of an insured loss. Losses up to the deductible amount shall be the responsibility of Contractor unless caused solely by the Owner. C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E's sub -consultants, separate contractors described in Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 2.6 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a Person or entity even though that Person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the Person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. PART 3 — TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1. PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) calendar days thereafter unless a different time period is specified in the Contract Documents. If Contractor fails to perform in a timely manner in accordance with the Contract Documents and, through the fault of Contractor or Subcontractor(s), fails to meet the Progress Schedule, Contractor shall be in default and shall take such steps as may be necessary to immediately improve its progress without change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 3.2. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within 14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Progress Schedule shall not exceed time limits specified by the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work, and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment. 1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion Date. 2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs to the Project. B. Form of Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET specified by Owner. The preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions of the Work, with a more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed by Owner. C. Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner shall return comments on the preliminary Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor's schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor's construction means, methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this Section 3.2. D. Monthly updates and compliance with Progress Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.5, Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the Work. E. Contractor to notify Owner of delays: Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the most recent Progress Schedule submitted to Owner. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such Notice does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 3.3. OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually agreed. B. Compliance with suspension: Owner's options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either: 1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work; or 2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of Part 9. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -10 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work. D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements set forth in Part 7. 3.4. OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP AND/OR CARRY OUT THE WORK FOR CAUSE A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor's failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until Owner has accepted satisfactory corrective action. B. Owner may carry out the Work after Contractor's failure to perform: If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten -Day period after receipt of written Notice from Owner to commence and continue to make reasonable progress toward the correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies Owner may have, correct such deficiencies, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting, from payments then or thereafter due Contractor, the reasonable cost of correcting the deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for A/E's additional services made necessary by the default, neglect or failure. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. C. No equitable adjustment for Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of performance attributable to Contractor's failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure. 3.5. DELAY A. Force Majeure actions not a default; Force Majeure defined: Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or Contractor, shall not constitute a default if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party ("Force Majeure"). Acts of Force Majeure include, but are not limited to: 1. Acts of God or the public enemy; 2. Acts or omissions of any government entity not the fault of Owner or Contractor; 3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible; 4. Quarantine or epidemic (excluding impacts from COVID-19 reasonably foreseeable at the time of Contract execution); GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -11 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 5. Industry -wide strike or defensive lockout; 6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated; and 7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available. B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force Majeure. C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Sections 7.2 and 7.3. D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3 but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum. F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise. Contractor shall not recover damages, an equitable adjustment, or an increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time from Owner where Contractor could have reasonably avoided the delay by the exercise of due diligence. G. Types of damages permitted: If Contractor is entitled to a change in the Contract Sum, the amount of the changed shall be the actual costs incurred as calculated in accordance with Section 7.2. Contractor shall not otherwise be entitled to damages arising out of actual or alleged loss of efficiency; morale, fatigue, attitude, or labor rhythm; constructive acceleration; home office overhead; expectant underrun; trade stacking; reassignment of workers; rescheduling of Work, concurrent operations; dilution of supervision; learning curve; beneficial orjoint occupancy; logistics; ripple; season change; extended overhead; profit upon damages for delay; impact damages including cumulative impacts; or similar damages. Any effect that such alleged GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -12 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET events may have on Contractor or its Subcontractors is subsumed in and fully compensated through the percentage Fee on Change Orders paid through Section 7.2.B.7.e and any liquidated damages paid hereunder. H. Float: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, or to any additional payment or equitable adjustment of any sort, by reason of the loss or the use of any float time, including time between Contractor's anticipated completion date and the end of the Contract Time, whether or not the float time is described as such on the Progress Schedule. 3.6. NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to Owner. B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub -subcontracts, that in the event timely performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the dispute. 3.7. DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION A. Liquidated Damages Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated damages are included in the Contract Documents. 2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain. This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the Contractor. 3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated damages shall not release Contractor from any obligations or liabilities pursuant to the Contract Documents. If Contractor substantially fails GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -13 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET to perform in a timely manner in accordance with the Contract Documents and, through the fault of Contractor or Subcontractor(s), fails to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, Contractor shall be in default. B. Actual Damages Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs against any payment due Contractor. PART 4— SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1. DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner in writing. D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents — responsibility Contractor shall do no Work without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, Contract shall be responsible for the performance and shall bear the cost for its correction. E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any Work or materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract Documents even if the Contract Documents do not GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -14 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON mention them specifically. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET F. Interpretation questions referred to Owner: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner. 4.2. PROJECT RECORD A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall Legibly mark in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including horizontal and vertical locations of sub -structural materials referenced to permanent visible and accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals (COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the "Project Record." The Project Record shall include all Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical, Structural and Civil as -built Drawings, whether or not any changes occur and shall also include Addenda, Change Orders, Field Authorization, CCD and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, as well as one copy of approved shop drawings, product data, samples and similar required submittals. B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the Project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly Labeled "PROJECT RECORD." The Project Record shall be available to A/E and Owner The Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to Owner at all times. C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance 4.3. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Definition of Shop Drawings: "Shop Drawings" means documents and other information required to be submitted to Owner by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -15 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Shop Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed by the state of Washington. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor's approval shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or separate contractors. Contractor's submittal schedule shall allow a reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop Drawings approved: Approval, or other appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, by Owner or A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by Owner or A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during construction or constitute an approval of Contractor's means or methods of construction. If Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of correction. D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents: Shop Drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. If Shop Drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be approved by Owner in writing and recorded upon the Project Record. Approval for substitutions shall not be sought and shall not be approved through the submission of Shop Drawings or other submittals. E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor. 4.4. ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -16 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET generally with trade practices. These sections are for Owner and Contractor convenience and shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. 4.5. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS A. The City/Owner not Contractor, owns Copyright of Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E's contracted service to Owner through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor's set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work. B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this Project: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work. C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non- exclusive license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein, prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in Section 5.3 and 5.22 from anyviolations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising out of Owner's use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor's own cost, licenses in conformity with this section. D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -17 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET E. Electronic Files: If the parties intend to transmit the instruments of A/E's service or any other information or documentation in digital form (other than PDF), they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Contract Documents. PART 5 — PERFORMANCE 5.1. CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner. B. Competent Superintendent required: Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to Owner the name and qualifications of its proposed superintendent. Owner may reply within 14 Days to Contractor in writing stating (1) whether Owner has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that Owner requires additional time to review. Failure of Owner to replywithin the 14-Day period shall constitute Notice of no reasonable objection. The superintendent shall not be employed on any other Project during the course of the Work without prior written approval by Owner. Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a competent superintendent who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work and who has authority to act on behalf of Contractor. Communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The superintendent must be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for transition. C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and agents: Contractor shall be responsible to Ownerfor acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents. D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among all of the Contractor's employees and other persons performing the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor's employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -18 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings. F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors' employees, if they are in violation of this act. 5.2. PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Permits: Ownerwill obtain and payfor the Land Use Permit and Building Permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the Work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed permits shall be delivered to Owner. B. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 5.3. PATENTS AND ROYALTIES Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement 5.4. PREVAILING WAGES A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Washington Department of Labor and Industries or the federal Davis -Bacon Act Prevailing Wage Rates, as amended (40 U.S.C. 3141 — 3148); whichever is the greater. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The State of Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in King County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and Industries: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates. Based upon the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this Project is the bid posting date. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 -19 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: Before payment is made by the Owner to the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed uponthe Work by Contractor and Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate. C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved bythe Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project. D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060. E. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of Intent at job site: Each Application for Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre -filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made. F. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296- 127 WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification. G. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall submit a certified copy of payroll records if requested. 5.5. HOURS OF LABOR A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service. B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 20 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET contractor or subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such agreement may provide that the employees work ten-hour days for more than four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any such agreement. 5.6. NONDISCRIMINATION A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status, honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement. B. During performance of the Work: Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW49.60. 2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mentaldisability. 3. Contractor to notify unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers' representative of Contractor's obligations according to the Contract Documents and RCW49.60. 4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this section of the Contract Documents. 5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in every Subcontract. 5.7. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 21 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Contractor responsible for safety Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the Project site. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to working hours. In performing this Contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractor shall: Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and provide a site -specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor shall submit a site -specific safety plan to the Owner's representative prior to the initial scheduled construction meeting. 2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades, signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators, shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles, construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local laws and regulations. 3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean AirAct, Shoreline Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. 4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction site. B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions means and methods relating to employees, public, or agents of the Contractors. Any review by Owner or A/E of Contractor's performance shall not be construed to include a review of the adequacy of Contractor's safety measures in, on or near the site of the Work. C. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and equipment whether on site or stored off -site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affectthem. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 22 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET D. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupationaldisease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of exposure. E. Contractor to provide HazMat training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their workarea. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of: a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health Standards; b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present; and C. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC. 2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the Project site which includes: a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.); b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area; C. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and d. Hazard communications program: The details of the hazard communications program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or harmful substances shall include the following duties: GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 23 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport, generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter collectively referred to as "hazardous substances"), in violation of any such law, regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be stored more than 90 Days on the Project site. 2. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law, regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the Project site. G. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public. Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor's responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic byway of detours shall be borne by Contractor. H. Contractor to act in an emergency In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this Section 5.7 shall relieve Contractor of sole and complete responsibility for safety at the Project site, for the violation of safety or property protection requirements or the correction thereof, or impose any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public. Any Notice Owner or A/E gives to Contractor of a safety or property protection violation will not: (1) relieve Contractor of sole and complete responsibility for the violation and the correction thereof, or for sole liability for the consequences of said violation; (2) impose any obligation upon Owner or A/E to inspect or review Contractor's safety program or precautions or to enforce Contractor's compliance with the requirements of this Section 5.7; or (3) impose any continuing obligation upon Owner or A/E to provide such Notice to Contractor or any other persons or entity. 5.8. OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGEAREAS A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to Owner -approved areas. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 24 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work. C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or Local law or regulation. D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or applicable law. E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on -site: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use. F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equipment: Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment untilthe date of Substantial Completion and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor. 5.9. PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION Excavation defined: Use of locator services: "Excavation" means an operation in which earth, rock, or other material on or below the ground is moved or otherwise displaced by any means, except the tilling of soil less than 12 inches in depth for agricultural purposes, or road ditch maintenance that does not change the original road grad or ditch flow line. Before commencing any excavation, Contractor shall provide notice of the scheduled commencement of excavation to all owners of underground facilities or utilities, through locator services. 5.10. UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 25 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice. B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a change in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part7. 5.11. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. Contractor to protect and repair property: At all times until Owner's occupancy of the Work or a designated portion of the Work, Contractor shall protect the Work from damage, weather, deterioration, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief and shall bear the risk of any uninsured loss or destruction of, or injury or damage to, all materials, equipment, tools, and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work or designated portion, or consumed or used in the performance of the Work or designated portion, including all Work in process and completed Work. Contractor shall protect from damage all existing structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, streets, curbs, walks and vegetation: at or near the Project site or on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by Contractor. Contractor shall repair any damage, including that to the property of a third party. Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to Contractor. If a governmental authority having jurisdiction requires that the repairing and patching be done with its own labor and/or materials, Contractor shall abide by such regulations, and it shall pay for this work at no additional cost to Owner. B. Special site conditions: If, in the course of the Work, Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify Owner and A/E. Upon receipt of such Notice, Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. Contractor shall continue to suspend these operations until otherwise instructed by Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 26 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Part 8. 5.12. LAYOUT OF WORK A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision. B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall layout the Work from Owner -established baselines and benchmarks indicated on the Drawings and shall be responsible for all field measurements about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks established. 5.13. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of A/E and after submittal and approval of a substitute request, is equal to that named in the Specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in the ContractDocuments. B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly or receive or be received by work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not damage or endanger any work of Owner or separate contractors by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance byOwner. Contractor shall restore all areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in anyway not in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be rejected by Owner. However, neither this authority of Owner nor a decision made either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of Owner or its representatives to Contractor, Subcontractors, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 5.14. AVAI LABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 27 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost to the Contractor. 5.15. TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Contractor to provide for all testing and inspection of Work: Contractor shall maintain an adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection and quality surveillance of all its Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. Contractor shall give Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner. B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Constitute or imply acceptance; 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or equipment; 4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or 5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any other remedy to which it may be entitled. C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract Documents: Neither observations by an inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents. D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re -inspection or retest necessary. Owner shall perform GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 28 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work. 5.16. CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of Owner or the requirements in the Contract Documents or a governmental authority having jurisdiction, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered for Owner's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense and without change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If, at anytime prior to Final Completion, Owner desires to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and reconstruction. C. Contractor to correct and pay for non -conforming Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by Owner not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including additional testing and inspections. D. Contractor's compliance with correct and warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.8, or within the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written Notice from Owner to do so. Owner shall give such Notice promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor's duty to correct with respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. Obligations under this Section 5.16 shall survive FinalAcceptance and are in addition to other warranties provided by contract or law. E. Contractor to remove non -conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner. F. Owner may charge Contractor for non -conforming Work: If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 29 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET may replace, correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may be commenced. Owner may accept non -conforming Work and charge Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable. 5.17. CLEAN UP Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site, including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. 5.18. ACCESS TO WORK Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in progress wherever located. 5.19. OTHER CONTRACTS Owner may award other contracts; Contractor to cooperate: Owner may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the Project site. Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of Contractor, who shall reasonably cooperate with the other contractors and with Owner's employees and shall carefully adapt scheduling and perform the Work in accordance with these Contract Documents to reasonably accommodate the other work. 5.20. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 30 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Subcontractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in each of its first -tier subcontracts and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first -tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: 1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; 2. Have a current City of Renton business license; 3. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; 4. If applicable, have: a. Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the subcontractor's employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title50 RCW; C. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; 5. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). 6. Not be disqualified from bidding or working on any project receiving federal public works contract under SAM.gov. 7. Need any supplemental responsibility criteria set forth in the Contract Documents. B. N/A C. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civiljudgment entered by a court of limited or genera ljurisdiction to have willfully violated , as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. D. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 31 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET providing materials in excess of $2,500. Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection and shall obtain Owner's written consent before making any substitutions or additions. A "reasonable objection" shall include without limitation: 1. A proposed Subcontractor differing from the entity listed with a proposal or bid, 2. Lack of "responsibility" of the proposed Subcontractor, as defined in RCW 39.04.350 or otherwise in the Contract Documents, 3. Lack of qualification, including technical qualification, as required by the Specifications, or 4. Material failure to perform satisfactorily (such as causing a material delay or submitting a Claim Owner considers inappropriate) on one or more projects for Owner within five (5) years of the bidding date. E. Subcontracts in writing and pass -through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. However, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds. F. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents. G. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that: Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.1 and only for those Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and 2. Owner assumes Contractor's responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed in the Subcontract. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 32 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5.21. WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by Contractor. B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall: Obtain warranties: Obtain, assign if requested, and furnish directly to Owner, all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice or that are required by the Contract Documents, first executed by the applicable Subcontractor and those suppliers and manufacturers furnishing materials for the Work, and subsequently countersigned by Contractor, which shall extend to Owner all rights, claims, benefits and interests that Contractor may have under express or implied warranties or guarantees against the Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer for defective or non -conforming Work; 2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of Owner; 3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by Owner; and 4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranties should they extend beyond the period specified in the Contract Documents. C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final Acceptance. 5.22. INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Owner, its elected officials, officers, agents, consultants, administrators, employees and volunteers, and successors and assigns of any of them (collectively, the "Indemnified Parties"), from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees incurred on such claims or in proving the right to indemnification, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising out of bodily injury or death to persons, and damage to property, direct and indirect, or consequential, arising out of, caused by, or resulting from negligent acts or omissions or willful misconduct of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, their agents and anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable (collectively, the "Indemnitors"), except to the extent of any concurrent negligence on the part of the Indemnified Parties. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 33 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest, including copyright, trademark, and trade secret. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115, (Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration, improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate) then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of Indemnitors and Indemnified Parties, Indemnitor's liability shall be only to the extent of Indemnitor's negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement constitute Indemnitor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. The obligations of Contractor under this Section 5.22 shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Section. To the extent the wording of this Section 5.22 would reduce or eliminate the insurance coverage of Owner or Contractor, this Section 5.22 shall be considered modified to the extent that such insurance coverage is not affected. To the extent that any portion of this Section 5.22 is stricken by a court or arbitrator for any reason, all remaining provisions shall retain their vitality and effect. The provisions of this Section 5.22 shall survive completion, acceptance, final payment and termination of the Contract. PART 6 — PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1. CONTRACT SUM Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus Washington State sales tax for performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6.2. SCHEDULE OFVALUES Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner ("Schedule of Values"). The approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, Project Record, O&M manuals, and any other requirements for Project closeout in advancing the Work from Substantial Completion to Final Completion. The approved Schedule of Values shall be used by Owner and Architect/Engineer as the basis for reviewing progress payments. Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of Values. 6.3. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 34 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for Work (on a form approved by Owner) completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner may require. B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW 60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding Application for Payment. By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section 1.3, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the Application for Payment. Owner has the right to request written evidence from Contractor that Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by Owner to Contractor for subcontracted Work. Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Owner shall not have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. C. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress of the Work with the Progress Schedule. D. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off -site: If authorized by Owner, the Application for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and suitably stored, orfor completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of the following: 1. Suitable facility or location: The material will be placed in a facility or location that is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored; 2. Facility or location within 10 miles of Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner; 3. Facility or location exclusive to Project's materials: Only materials for the Project are stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside for the Project); 4. Insurance provided on materials in facility or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of insurance extending Contractor's insurance coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or intransit; 5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor's authorized personnel shall have access; GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 35 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall at all times have the right of access in company of Contractor; 7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for stored materials: Contractor and its surety assume total responsibility for the stored materials; and 8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials are moved from storage to the Project site. 6.4. PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Withholding retainage: Options for retainage: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each progress payment until45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds. C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents. A progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work. D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.5. PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Owner's right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limitedto: Non -compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 36 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET the Work required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 3. Owner correction or completion of Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16; 4. Third party Claims: Claims (except where an insurer has unconditionally accepted coverage) filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless Contractor provides security acceptable to Owner; 5. Failure to pay Subcontractor: The failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; 6. Damages: Damage to Owner or a separate contractor (except where an insurer has unconditionally accepted coverage); 7. Delay: Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; 8. Affidavits of Wages Paid: Failure to submit affidavits pertaining to wages paid as requested or otherwise required by statute; 9. Progress Schedule: Failure to submit a properly updated Progress Schedule; 10. Liquidated damages; 11. Maintenance of Project Record: Failure to properly maintain as the Project Record; 12. Other construction records: Failure to properly submit any other required construction reports or records; 13. Certified payrolls: Failure to properly submit certified payrolls when requested; 14. Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor's failure to otherwise perform in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 15. Contractor's negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the result of Contractor's fault or negligent acts oromissions. B. Ownerto notify Contractor of withholding for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.6. RETAINAGE, BOND CLAIM RIGHTS, AND LIENS A. Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW, concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully set forth herein. B. Liens: Contractor shall promptly pay (and secure the discharge of any liens asserted by) all persons properly furnishing labor, equipment, materials or other items in GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 37 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET connection with the performance of the Work (including, but not limited to, any Subcontractors) to the extent that Owner has paid Contractor for this Work. Owner may, at its option, withhold payment, in whole or in part, to Contractor until lien and claims reports are furnished. Contractor may provide other security acceptable to Owner, such as a bond, in lieu of paying disputed liens or claims. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Owner from any liens, including all expenses and attorneys' fees, except to the extent a lien has been filed because of failure of payment by Owner for the Work in any such lien. 6.7. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use for which it is intended. , the Project has been constructed in substantial accordance with the Contract Documents, and at a minimum the following elements have been accomplished (see also, Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements): 1. Awritten punch list has been prepared; 2. Commissioning is successfully completed; 3. The Authority Having Jurisdiction has granted a certificate of occupancy; and 4. The first final draft of the O&M manuals has been submitted to Owner. All Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been achieved if the Work cannot achieve Final Completion within the time specified in the Agreement. The date Substantial Completion is achieved shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion which must be approved by Change Order. Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved. 6.8. PRIOR OCCUPANCY A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written Notice thereof to Contractor, take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work ("Prior Occupancy") at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a Date of Substantial or Final Completion; establish a date for termination or partial termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims. If Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, or fails to achieve Final Completion GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 38 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET of the Work within the time specified in the Contract Documents, Owner may take possession of, use or operate all or any part of the Work without an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time on account of such possession or use. B. Damage: Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy. Contractor's one-year dutyto repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. 6.9. FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved shall be within the time period specified and established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action (see also, Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements). B. Final Acceptance defined: Unless otherwise determined by Owner, Final Acceptance shall be achieved after Contractor has completed all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing. Pursuant to RCW 60.28, "Lien for Labor, Materials, Taxes on Public Works," completion of the Contract Work shall occur upon Final Acceptance. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and performance bonds, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (see also, Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements). C. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims made in accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8. PART 7 — CHANGES 7.1. CHANGE IN THE WORK A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time by Change Order: Owner may, at anytime and without notice to Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in the Work without invalidating the Contract. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through the GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 39 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Section 7.2 or 7.3, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be incorporated into a Change Order. B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as mutually agreed. Contractor's Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change in the Work. C. COP negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.2 and 7.3, Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner's approval. All Work done pursuant to any Owner -directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written response within 30 Days of Contractor's request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner's final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement, Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8. F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 40 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following: 1. The scope of work 2. An agreed upon maximum not -to -exceed amount 3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time 4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions 5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data, a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order. 7.2. CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM A. Genera lApplication 1. Contract Sum changes only by Change Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Sum in its Change Order Proposal. 2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor's changed cost of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner; or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.5. a. Notice and record keeping for equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice deliveredto Owner within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes of this part, "occurrence" means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent prosecution of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and, if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner. b. Content of notice for equitable adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or costs that occurred more than 7 Days before GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 41 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Contractor's written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. C. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.3C. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. d. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of theWork. e. Contractor to combine requests for same event together: Any requests by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together. 3. Methods for calculating Change Order amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the ContractSum, shall be determined by one of the following methods: a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.213. b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as determined in paragraph 7.2C. C. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph 7.2D. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 42 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may direct otherwise: When Owner has requested Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submittingits proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the basis of the fixed price method. B. Change Order Pricing— Fixed Price Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following procedures shall apply: Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor's Change Order Proposal, or request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below and shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner. 2. Use of industry standards in calculating costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and Contractor. 3. Costs contingent on Owner's actions: If any of Contractor's pricing assumptions are contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the proposal or request for an equitable adjustment. 4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools, overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference. 5. Breakdown not required if change less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fairvalue. 6. Breakdown required if change between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to determine fair value: a. lump sum labor; b. lump sum material; GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 43 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON C. lump sum equipment usage; d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the fixed price method shall include only the following items: a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following: (1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the Department of Labor and Industries approved "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working supervisor's hours. (2) Worker's insurance: Direct contributions to the State of Washington forindustrial insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates established by the Department of Labor and Industries. (3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State Unemployment Compensation Act. (4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, required by regional labor union agreements, which are itemized and identified separately. b. Material costs: This is an itemization, including material invoice or reasonable lump sum estimate, of the quantity and cost of additional materials needed to perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from standard industry pricing guides acceptable to Owner. Material costs shall consider all available discounts. Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges shall be itemized. C. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be used on the change in the Work on -site. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment only to the extent used solely for the changed Work, or for additional rental costs actually incurred by Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following sources: GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 44 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET (1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). (2) The Associated General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. (3) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical work. (4) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment usedon mechanical work. The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. The rate for Contractor -owned equipment necessarily standing by for future use on the changed Work shall be no more than 50% of the rate established above unless otherwise approved by Owner. The total cost of rental allowed shall not exceed the cost of purchasing the equipment outright. d. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors' cost of Work shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor. e. Fee: This is compensation for all items not listed above, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract Sum. No Fee shall be due, however, for direct settlements of Subcontractor claims by Owner after Substantial Completion. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.3D, the amount of such compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this subsection (e). The fee shall compensate Contractor for, among other things, combined overhead, profit and other costs, including all office, home office and site overhead (including clerical assistants, all non -craft labor, project manager, project engineer(s), other engineers, estimators, superintendent and their vehicles), employee per diem, subsistence and travel costs not separately reimbursable under subsection a above, warranty, safety costs, printing and copying, quality control/assurance, purchasing, small or hand tool (a tool that costs $250 or less and is normally furnished by the performing contractor) or expendable charges, temporary construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, Project Record, home office cost, taxes (including B&O taxes but excluding sales tax payable based on the amount of the Application for Payment), office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of extended time, Claim and change preparation, direct and indirect delay, acceleration or impact, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. The Fee shall be strictly Limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below: GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 45 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET (1) Projects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor's own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (a) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6% of the first $50,000 ofthe amount due each Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any. (c) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.213 7a.—e. (2) Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor's own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (a) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (c) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 46 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is tobe applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.213 7a.—e. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is defined as: (1) Contractor's liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor's liability insurance arising directlyfrom execution of the Change Order; and (2) Payment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for Contractor's bond arising directly from the changed Work. The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after the Fee is calculated in accordance subsection (e) above. C. Change Order Pricing— Unit Prices Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a unit -price basis, Owner's authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre -agreed rates for material quantities; and C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; and C. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.213 and satisfy the following requirements: a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs; and b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported byfield measurement statements signed by Owner. D. Change Order Pricing — Time -and -Material Prices GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 47 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a time -and -material basis, Owner's authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre -agreed rates, if any, for material quantities or labor; and C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2 working days for Owner's review. C. Allow Owner to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; d. Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as efficiently as possible; and e. Not exceed Owner's cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.213 and additional verification supported by: a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and b. Invoices: Invoices for material. 7.3. CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME A. Changes in Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor's fault: If the Contract Time is changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to submit a Notice and Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the Section 8.1. No adjustment in the Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed time of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule. Any change in the Contract Time covered by a Change Order or based on a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of the Work GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 48 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET attributable to the change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the Change Order or Claim. Any request for adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives. D. Cost arising from change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change in Contract Time in accordance with this Section 7.3.D and the Contract Documents, subject to the following conditions: 1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or others for whom Owner is responsible; 2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.3.13; and 3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.3.0 Owner is not obligated directly or indirectly for damages, an adjustment, or an increase in the Contract Sum for any delay suffered by a Subcontractor that does not increase the Contract Time.; PART 8 — CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1. PROCEDURE FOR NOTICE AND CLAIMS A. Procedure to reduce disputes: In an effort to reduce the incidence and cost to all parties of extended disputes, all Claims, direct or indirect, arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except those that have been waived under the terms of the Contract Documents, shall be decided exclusively by the following alternative dispute resolution procedure unless the parties mutually agree in writing otherwise. B. Notice: Except for Claims requiring Notice before proceeding with the affected Work as otherwise described in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall submit a written Notice to Owner's Project Manager, consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents, within seven Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to a Claim. The Notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of the event leading to or causing the Claim, the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, and an estimate of any claimed adjustments in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Contractor Claim filing deadline: Thereafter, Contractor shall submit any Claim within 14 Days after Notice is provided in accordance with Section 8.1.13. D. Owner to make decision on all Claims: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim to Owner that complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 49 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET and 8, Owner will endeavor to respond, in writing, to Contractor within 7 Business Days of the date the Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor of the date by which the Owner expects to render a decision. If necessary to fully and fairly evaluate a Claim, Owner may request additional information or extend the time in which to respond. If Owner does not timely respond, a Claim will be deemed denied. E. Contractor may proceed to formal dispute resolution: If Contractor disagrees with the decision of Owner on Contractor's Claim, or if no decision is timely received thereby denying the Claim, Contractor may thereafter follow the procedure set forth in Section 8.2. F. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: A Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor (and Subcontractors) may be entitled and may not contain reservations of rights without Owner's written approval; any such unapproved reservations of rights shall be without effect. Any requests by Contractor for an adjustment in both the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together. Any claim of a Subcontractor may be brought only through, and after review by, Contractor. A Claim must be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, a Claim shall contain the following information: Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional compensation and/or time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the Claim, that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of; 2. Dates: The date on which event(s) arose which gave rise to the Claim; 3. Owner and A/E employee's knowledgeable about Claim: The name of each employee of Owner or A/E believed to be knowledgeable about the Claim; 4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents which support the Claim; 5. Identification of other supporting information: The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim; 6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the Contract Documents, that support the Claim; 7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor's analysis of its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time showing cause and analysis of the resultant delay to the critical path and other information required by the Contract Documents; GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 50 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 8. Details on Claim for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories and with the detail required by Section 7.2; and 9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and accurate to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes Owner is responsible. G. False Claims: Contractor shall not knowingly make any negligent or fraudulent misrepresentations, concealments, errors, omissions, or inducements to Owner in the formation or performance of this Contract. If Contractor or a Subcontractor submits a false or frivolous Claim to Owner, which for purposes of this Section is defined as a Claim based in whole or in part upon a materially incorrect fact, statement, representation, assertion, or record, Owner shall be entitled to collect from Contractor by offset or otherwise (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) any and all costs and expenses, including investigation and consultant costs, incurred by Owner in investigating, responding to, and defending against such false or frivolous Claim.: H. Owner's review of Claim and finality of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor's Claim, Owner mayvisit the Project site, communicate directlywith Subcontractors, or request additional information at any time (including requesting an audit as authorized in Section 8.3), in order to fully evaluate the issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final resolution of any Claim. Owner's written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in Section 8.2. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with this Section: Any Claim of Contractor against Owner shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by Contractor unless made in accordance with the requirements of Part 8. Any Notice and any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, whether under the Contract or otherwise, must be made pursuant to and in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. No act, omission, or knowledge, actual or constructive, of Owner or A/E shall in any way be deemed to be a waiver of the requirement for timely written Notice and a timely written Claim unless Owner and Contractor sign an explicit, unequivocal written waiver. The fact that Owner and Contractor may consider, discuss, or negotiate a Claim that has or may have been procedurally or substantively defective or untimely under the Contract shall not constitute a waiver of the provisions of the Contract Documents unless Owner and Contractor sign an explicit, unequivocal written waiver. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that Contractor's failure to timely submit required Notices and/or timely submit Claims has a substantial impact upon and prejudices Owner, including but not limited to its inability to fully investigate or verify the Claim, mitigate damages, choose alternative options, adjust the budget, GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 51 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET delete or modify the impacted Work, and/or monitor time, cost and quantities. Liens: If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice and filing deadlines. 8.2. ARBITRATION A. Timingof Contractor's demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner's decision rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.1 D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 Days after the date of Owner's decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said 30 Day period shall result in Owner's decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its Subcontractors. B. Filing of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows: 1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules; or 2. Claims greater than $30,000: Disputes over $30,000 shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to use the expedited rules. C. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained. D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Change Order: If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency orproductivity. 8.3. AUDITS A. Owner may audit Claims: All Project costs of the Contractor and Subcontractors of any tier are subject to audit at any time. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar anyrecovery. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 52 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Contractor to promptly make documents available: In support of Owner audit, Contractor and any Subcontractor shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner within 7 Days of Owner's request, at the office of Contractor or respective Subcontractor during normal business hours, at least the followingdocuments and other documents requested by Owner: 1. Daily time sheets and supervisor's daily reports; 2. Collective bargaining agreements; 3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records; 4. Payroll registers; 5. Earnings records; 6. Payrolltaxforms; 7. Material invoices, requisitions, and deliveryconfirmations; 8. Material cost distribution worksheet; 9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.); 10. Vendors', rental agencies', Subcontractors', and agents' invoices; 11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower -tier Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts; 12. Subcontractors' and agents' payment certificates; 13. Cancelled checks (payroll andvendors); 14. Job cost report, job cost detail reports, related labor and equipment reports, and including monthly totals; 15. Job payroll ledger; 16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries; 17. General ledger; 18. Cash disbursements journal; 19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Work; 20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, orothers; 21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor's internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents; 22. All non -privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 53 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET with all documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time sought by each Claim; 23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals; 24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid; 25. N/A; and 26. The above items for its Subcontractors. C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours. Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner's auditors. PART 9 — TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the followingevents: 1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time; 2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of itsinsolvency; 3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replaceor correct Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents; 4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled workers or proper materials orequipment; 5. Contractor failure to pay Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor; 6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards orfails to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; or GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 54 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of any provision of the Contract Documents. B. Owner's actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at itsoption: 1. Take possession of Project site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work; 2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.20; and 3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems expedient. C. Surety's role: Owner's rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Contractor's required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this section, Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.213 and shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is accepted. E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E's services and expenses made necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These obligations for payment shall survive termination. F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work performed: Termination of the Work in accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for Work performed. G. Conversion of "Termination for Cause" to "Termination for Convenience": If Owner terminates Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in paragraph 9.1A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 9.2. 9.2. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of Owner. B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 55 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET shallpromptly: 1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of termination; 2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is notterminated; 3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated; 4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts; 5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest; and 6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not terminated C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part7. D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner. PART 10 — MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1. GOVERNING LAW Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King County. 10.2. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Bound to successors: Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 56 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET party in respect to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations set forth in the Contract Documents. If a majority of the ownership or the control of Contractor is acquired by a third party, and such acquisition reasonably imperils performance or creates a conflict of interest that Owner, in its sole discretion, cannot reasonably reconcile, then Owner may terminate this Contract at any time for cause under Section 9.1. 10.3. MEANINGOFWORDS Meaning of words used in Contract Documents: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical, or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference is specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. Wherever in the Drawings and Specifications an items, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the Drawings or required to complete the installation. 10.4. RIGHTS AND REMEDIES A. No waiver of rights: Waiver of any provisions of the Contract Documents must be in writing and authorized by Owner. No other waiver is valid on behalf of Owner. No action, delay in acting, or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action, delay in acting, or failure to act constitute approval or an acquiescence in a breach therein, or otherwise prejudice the right of Owner to enforce a right or remedy at any subsequent time, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. B. Rights under Contract do not limit other rights: Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. C. If portion of Contract is void, remainder is enforceable: If any portion of this Contract is held to be void or unenforceable, the remainder of the Contract shall be enforceable without such portion. 10.5. CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Contractor must be registered and licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered and licensed as required by the laws of the State of Washington, including but not limited to RCW 18.27, and the City of Renton. Contractor shall also have a current state unified business identifier number; have industrial insurance coverage for Contractor's GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 57 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; have an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; have a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW, and; not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 (unregistered or unlicensed contractors) or RCW 39.12.065(3) (prevailing wage violations). 10.6. TIME COMPUTATIONS Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are excluded from the computation. 10.7. RECORDS RETENTION / PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS A. Six -year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.3, shall be retained for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance. B. Record Keeping and Reporting: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act (Chapter 42.56 RCW). C. Public Records Compliance: To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at Contractor's own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys' fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which Contractor has withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order. 10.8. THIRD -PARTY AGREEMENTS No third -party relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons other than Owner and Contractor. 10.9. ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 58 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order. Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub- Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor. 10.10. HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for convenience of reference and shall not be used in anyway in connection with the meaning, effect, interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions. 10.11. DIVERSE BUSINESS PARTICIPATION A. The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Diverse Businesses as found in RCW Chapters 39, 43, and WAC 326. The voluntary Diverse Business goal of 26%, which is an aggregate of: 10% Minority Business Enterprises (MBE), 6%Women Business Enterprises (WBE), 5%Veteran-owned Business, and 5% Washington Small Businesses self- identified in the Washington Electronic Business Solution (WEBS) https://omwbe.wa.gov/directory-certified-businesses. Contractors are encouraged to meet or exceed the project goals in the advertisement by any level of participation, regardless of category. 10.12. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR A. Contractor is independent contractor: Contractor shall be and operate as an independent contractor in the performance of the Work and shall have complete control over and responsibility for all personnel performing the Work. Contractor is not authorized to enter into any agreements or undertakings for or on behalf of Owner or to act as or be an agent or employee of Owner. B. Owner will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The presence of Owner at the Project site shall not in any manner be construed as assurance that the Work is being completed in compliance with the Contract Documents, nor as evidence that any requirement of the Contract Documents of any kind, including Notice, has been met or waived. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 59 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON entities performing portions of the Work. 10.13. N/A END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 60 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 73 00 —SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. NON-DISCRIMINATION LAWS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Complywith all applicable federal, state and local nondiscrimination laws and/or policies, including but not limited to the Americans with Disabilities Act; Civil Rights Act; and the Age Discrimination Act. 1.2. WAGES AND JOB SAFETY A. Comply with all applicable laws, regulations and policies of the United States, State of Washington, and City of Renton which affect wages and job safety. State Prevailing Wage Laws (RCW 39.12) or federal Davis -Bacon Act, as amended, (40 U.S.C. 3141- 3148); whichever is greater, are applicable, to comply with such laws and Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wage to all workers, laborers, mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract. B. File a Statement of Intent to pay prevailing wage with the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries as required by RCW 39.12.040. Comply with the provisions of the rules and regulations of the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. 1.3. DISBARMENT AND CERTIFICATION A. Do not enter into any agreements or arrangements related to this Agreement with any party that is on the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries "Debarred Contractor List". 1.4. RECORD MAINTENANCE A. Maintain all books, records, documents, data, and other evidence relating to this Contract and performance of services, as described herein. Retain such records for a period of nine (9) years from the date of Final Acceptance, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims, or audit findings involving the records have been resolved. B. Access to Records and Data. At no additional cost, records relating to this Project, including all materials generated under this Contract, shall be subject at all reasonable times to inspection, review or audit by state granting agencies, Office of the State Auditor, and federal and state officials so authorized by law, regulation or agreement. 1.5. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY A. In accordance to 41 C.F.R. Part 60. B. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Requirements SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Comply with the requirements of the EPA's Utilization of Small, Minority, and Women's Business Enterprises in this work. Minority and Women's Business Participation — solicit and recruit, to the maximum extent possible, certified minority owned (MBE) and women owned (WBE) businesses. Meeting the goals is voluntary, achievement of these goals is encouraged and all Bidders/Contractors or organizations submitting qualifications shall take the following affirmative steps in procurement of goods and services: a. Included qualified minority and women's businesses on solicitation lists. b. Assure qualified minority and women's businesses are solicited whenever they are potential sources for services or supplies. C. Divide the total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities, to permit maximum participation by qualified minority and women's businesses. d. Establish delivery scheduled, where work requirements permit, whichwill encourage participation of qualified minority and women's businesses. e. Use the services and assistance of the State Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (OMWBE) and the Office of Minority Business Enterprisesof the U.S. Department of Commerce, as appropriate. MBE/WBE Goals: a. Purchased Goods — 8% MBE 4% WBE b. Purchased Services —10% MBE 4% WBE C. Professional Services —10% MBE 4% WBE MBE/WBE Reporting. In accordance with the deviation from 40 C.F.R. 33.502, signed November 8, 2013. 1.6. CONTRACT ANTI -KICKBACK A. Comply with the Copeland "Anti -Kickback" Act (40 U.S.C. 3145), prohibits from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the compensation to which he or she is entitled. 1.7. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT (40 U.S.C. 3701-3708) A. Employment of mechanics and laborers must be in compliance with 40 U.S.C. 3702, each contractor must be required to compute the wages of every mechanic and Laborer on the basis of a standard workweek of 40 hours. Work in excess of the standard work week is permissible provided that the worker is compensated at a rate of not less than one and a half times the basic rate of pay for all hours in excess of 40 hours in the workweek. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. In accordance to 40 U.S.C. 3704, no laborer or mechanic must be required to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous. 1.8. CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT A. Comply with all applicable standards, orders, or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671 q.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1251- 1387), as amended. 1.9. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL ARTIFACTS A. In the event that historical or cultural artifacts are discovered at the Project site during construction, construction shall immediately stop and notify the local historical preservation officer and the state historical perseveration officer and the Washington State Department of Archaeology and Historic Preservation. 1.10. TREATMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSETS A. Provide records of all equipment installed in the Work, description of the property, including serial number or other identification number. 1.11. RIGHT OF INSPECTION A. Authorized agent of the funding agencies shall have a right of access to the project at reasonable times, in order to monitor and evaluate performance, long-term obligations, compliance, and other quality assurance under the funding agreement. 1.12. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND SIGNS A. Post on Project Signage the acknowledgment of the applicable grant program's funding contribution. B. Post open visible signage or other appropriate media at project entrances and other Locations to notify the public of the closure of project site. 1.13. INDEMIFICATION RCW TITLE 51 —INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE A. Any agreement relating to this Project involving any contractors, subcontractors and/or vendors of any tier shall require that the contracting entity indemnify, defend, waive RCW 51 immunity, and otherwise protect, defend, indemnify and hold the City and its officers and employees harmless from all crimes, demands, or suits of law or equity arising in whole or in part. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.14. SECULAR USE OF FUNDS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. No funds maybe used to pay for any religious activities, worship, or instructions, or for the lands and facilities for religious activities, worship or instruction. 1.15. COVID-19-RELATED HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall follow all applicable federal, state, county and local health requirements for COVID-19-related safety and work conditions. B. The Contractor and its Subcontractors have a general obligation to keep a safe and healthy worksite. Under RCW 49.17.060, "each employer shall furnish to each of their employees a place of employment free from recognized hazards that are causing or Likely to cause serious injury or death to his or her employees and shall comply with the rules, regulations, and orders promulgated under this chapter." END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 00 80 00 —FORMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. Submit With Bid: SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Form A— Bid Form 1. Attachment 1 — Non -Collusion, Anti -Trust and Minimum Wage Affidavit B. Form B— Proposal Bid Bond 1.2. Forms Required Only if Bid is $1,000,000 or More: A. To Be Submitted with Bid: 1. Form C — List of Subcontractors (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural Steel, and Rebar Subcontractors) 1.3. Forms to be Completed by Apparent Low Bidder Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: A. Form D —Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation B. Form E — Qualifications of Project Key Personnel 1.4. Submit With Executed Agreement Between Owner and Contractor: A. Form F —100% Contract Bond Form B. Required Insurance Certificates END OF SECTION FORMS 00 80 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Bid Form - FORM A Bidder's Name: Address: Telephone: CITY OF RENTON HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK RENTON CITY HALL - LOBBY 1055 S. GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 BID FORM forthe Legacy Square - Phase 2 510S3'dSt Renton, WA 98057 Bids Due: 2:00 PM PDT September 23, 2025 (MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED) CAG-25-257 Having carefully examined the Bidding Documents and Instructions to Bidders, the Project site and conditions affecting the Work, and all Addenda, the undersigned Bidder certifies that: (i) it has the personnel and means to complete the Work and (ii) it will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and management to perform all Work required by, and in strict accordance with, the above -named documents for the following sum within the time fixed. All Bid amounts shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). The undersigned Bidder certifies that it is, at the time of submitting the Bid, and shall remain throughout the period of the Contract, licensed by the State of Washington to perform the type of work required under the Contract Documents. It further certifies that it is skilled and regularly engaged in the general class and type of work called for in the Contract Documents. Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 1 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Bid Form - FORM A A. BASE BID CAG-25-257 The Bidder agrees to complete the Work for this Project for the following lump sum Base Bid amount: DOLLARS (words) (numerals) Do not include in the Base Bid amount Washington State Sales Tax that will be paid based on the Contract Sum. B. ALTERNATIVE N/A C. TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS The Base Bid amount includes anytrench-excavation safety provisions required for compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW and Chapter 49.17 RCW, as applicable, and the amount included in the Base Bid is: $ D. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING If the Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more, as required by RCW 39.30.060, every Bidder must complete and provide the included Subcontractor listing forms (Forms C and Form D) in accordance with the applicable timing requirements. E. RECEIPT OFADDENDA Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. All requirements therein are included in the appropriate Bid amount. F. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL 1. Determination of Low Bidder: a. The City of Renton (alternatively referred to as "Owner" or "City") reserves the right to award the Contract for the Project based on the Contractor's Base Bid and any selected Alternate(s), in whatever manner is in the City's best interest. Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 2 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Bid Form - FORM A 2. Overhead and Profit: CAG-25-257 a. All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). G. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID The undersigned hereby agrees that this Bid shall be a valid and firm offering for the period of sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date. Within sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date, the City will act either to accept the Bid Form the Lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The City reserves the right to request extensions of such Bid acceptance period. The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request to furnish a bond (if required), evidence of required insurance to execute the Agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. H. EXECUTION OFCONTRACT If the written Notice of Intent to Award Contract is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered via facsimile to the undersigned within the period of Bid validity noted above, or anytime thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification, execute the City of Renton Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum ("Agreement") set forth in the Contract Documents. I. TIME FOR COMPLETION A. Notice to Proceed -Anticipated date for Notice to Proceed is October 20, 2025. B. The undersigned hereby agrees to: 1. Mobilization to Site - October 20, 2025. 2. Substantial Completion - Substantially complete all the Work under the Base Bid no later than March 20, 2026. 3. Final Completion -All the Work shall achieve Final Completion in accordance with the contract documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion. J. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 3 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 CAG-25-257 Bid Form - FORM A 0 The undersigned agrees to paythe Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $2,000.00for each calendar day beyond the date upon which Substantial Completion of the entire Work is required to be complete until Substantial Completion is achieved, in accordance with the Contract Documents. K. BID SECURITY (As per the Bidding Documents) If applicable, Bid Security must be submitted with the Bid Form. L. BID FORM ATTACHMENTS TO BE COMPLETED WITH BID FORM The following document is attached to the Bid Form and must be executed by the Contractor in connection with the Bid From for it to be complete: Attachment 1 - Non -Collusion, Anti -Trust and Minimum Wage Affidavit M. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The undersigned acknowledges that it has read, understands, and agrees to comply with all federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies during the performance of the Work. The undersigned Bidder further represents and certifies, under penalty of perjury, that within the three-year period immediately precedingthe Bid Date, the Bidder has not been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries, or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction, to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of Chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 4 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Bid Form - FORM A CAG-25-257 Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signatory: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 5 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Bid Form - FORM A CAG-25-257 Bid Form -Attachment 1 This form must be submitted with the Bid Form NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT The undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposes and says, that he/she is the identical person who submitted the forgoing Bid, and that such Bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing Work or equipment to put in a sham Bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from Bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER The City of Renton ("City") and Bidder recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges re- sultingfrom anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne bythe Bidder. Therefore, the Bidder hereby assigns to the City any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this Contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations com- mencing afterthe date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishingthe price underthis Contract. In addition, the Bidder warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to the City, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM The undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, says and certifythat in connection with the per- formance of the Work of this Project, (a) I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or me- chanic employed in the performance of such Work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal Contract and (b) that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 6 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 CAG-25-257 Bid Form - FORM A 0 FOR: NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT [Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid] [Signature of Authorized Official*] [Printed Name] [Title] [Date] [City] [State] Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20 End of Bid Form Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 7 of 7 Bid Form - Form A LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Proposal Bid Bond - FORM B FORM B (D Proposal Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor] of [address] as Principal, and [Surety] a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of , and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the Bid of said Principal for the Work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its sealed Bid for the following construction, to wit: said Bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal Bid by said Principal be accepted, and the Contract be awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said Contract and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10) days from and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect. IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of Renton in accordance with the terms of the Bidding Documents and furnish a performance bond with Surety or Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and sealed this day of , 20 [Principal] [Signature of authorized official] [Title] [Address] Legacy Square - Phase 2 Proposal Bid Bond - Form B [Surety] [Signature of authorized official] By: [Attorney -in -Fact] [Phone Number] End of Bid Form Page 1 of 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 List of Subcontractors — FORM C LEGACY SQUARE — PHASE 2 CAG 25-257 FORM C LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS In accordance with RCW 39.30-060: For all public works contracts exceeding $1,000,000 the bidder shall submit the names of the subcontractors with whom the bidder, if awarded the contract, will subcontract for the following work: • All heating, ventilation and air conditioning, and plumbing subcontractors as described in chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical subcontractors as described in chapter 19.28 RCW (this also includes the control system integrator subcontractor as well as other electrical subcontractors) shall be submitted as part of the bid. • All structural steel installation and rebar installation sub contractors shall be submitted as part of the bid. If the work does not apply to this contract, check the box "Not Applciable". If the work will be self performed by the bidder, check the box "Self Performed". If the subcontractors names are not submitted with the bid OR if two or more subcontractors are named to perform the same work, the bid shall be considered nonresponsive and, therefore, void. If subcontractors vary with bid alternates, please complete a separate form indicating which subcontractors will be used for which bid alternate. Complete the following: If awarded the contract, will contract with the following subcontractors for the performance of heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing, electrical (including automatic controls) work, structural steel installation, and rebar installation: The following list of subcontracts is due with the bid. Any errors in the proof of license for HVAC or plumbing contractors can be corrected within 48 hours of submission. Attach proof of contractors license with bid. Category of Work Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC) Not Applicable ❑ Subcontractors Name Self Performed ❑ Address Phone No. Category of Work Subcontractors Name Address Phone No. Contractor's License No. Plumbing (per RCW 18.106) Contractor's License No. Not Applicable ❑ Self Performed ❑ Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 1 of 2 List of Subcontractors — FORM C LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 List of Subcontractors — FORM C Category of Work Subcontractors Name Address Phone No. Category of Work Subcontractors Name Address Phone No. Electrical (per RCW 19.28) Contractor's License No. Structural Steel and Rebar Installation Contractor's License No. Not Applicable ❑ Self Performed ❑ Not Applicable ❑ Self Performed ❑ "I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the information provided by bidder in the subcontractor listing form is true and correct to the best of my knowledge and belief" Signature: Printed Name: Date: Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 2 of 2 List of Subcontractors — FORM C N W a a W a a N U Q w J w 0 LL c O ca ca W c 0 co U co 73 a 0 U E c O A O C6 _ O _ Q L N _ s 0 cc W I cc E cn 0 O L 3 O t co _ •s N N 3 ►7 _ O z •� to ❑ bOA H ❑ z ca = Z O inEl(� N N E m a) (Dcc m c N .' Z nO.o ; a) cn U U aD 0 (0 (�Y6 co0 0 E � co L O Q O Q .-1— cn z -0 U 0 p E U- 0 to U U ~ O ❑ _ c i O O 0 U 0 0 c (D 0 a) O o O z ca O s O m W un O T > U� z M CO Cl ❑ Z p �.-. a F o o v ❑ } i W a> a3 xU)w z c �� T Cc p +� LU LL cu M W ❑ Z a U 0 y Y _ Lco aD L Z 0_ } m J ao 0. 0 0 Q 0 a Q c v O �yy li U tw Y Y -0 o E �ZJ /yn E w -0 li o a � Q N E o Y E i 0 o o _ 3 D U c N +y+ 'c m o ai c6 + (a U 0 •O Q � 2 U co L -0 M C — Cl— cn � 2 a -0 vi 0 0 E E E o 0 0 0 0 to c.> � o E _0 W U p- M ° to °' cu Z c ai ai ui co W 0 m ' o s m 0 a aJU+ U to ��� U 0 U 7 E U U m U m E O W 0 0> 0 0 0 c a 0 m c c c m 0 0 0 U E W o cE 0) 0 0 fl fl a o i i i H zcu -8 m O_ O_ o o Q O O O U o 0 a Z a c0i no E� -0 az Z n3 Z az Z .> W iL) Q 0 0 0 �' 0 az E v0i acne az v0i az (D o o d U Z m U U •• • • N ch d y ns s EL a) a N v to w d J �r Cl) c 0 as W c 0 cu U co 73 a 0 U E O A N W a a w a a (n U a O w J w O LL A O cc a O L i s O W I O .E cn ,a W FDA O O N L O co 's 3 N N 3 ►7 ai ai 41 0 4.1 0 o p O o +� O O E L O E CL L V U .y y V U .y y R ca R o c U c c U U m O c U m O c c0 C y++ m = O C O V c0 c6 C y m = ++ O C O V m U- V) _ m U- cn 4- _ m y m y cc 0 � O O i.+m O to 3 E cc •� ca •0 4—E O — Q +� m U V c0 L m Oi "O �% V O L ca y O m L O _ L O _ O U d O i C9 O to Z y 0 OC Z O U — o O i 0 O y Z y 0 CC Z is O c O y LL❑ `° O❑ is O c O y LL❑ N❑ bA L i O y L d .O y L O bA L i N L E y d 0 y L O O a0 ii>- a>- O a0 ii>- a>- ai ai CEo Z y Z Gi O L a a) O 0. L Q _ 0. O c O to c o w ° w a U ++ Gi 4' Q- 'L o a+ GI L V y s ° C O s f0 ci U1 ui t i C O s cC w Q a I w y y O y y � L N E E f6 Z a c m Z U cc z a c m Z U W ++ O l � rO —d 1T � L: CL QO% OC a o a O s a w a a G O m a w aD VJ c6 s a N cc a N ca w d J U C O co 7 co W O cu U O _ a 0 U O A N W a a W a a (n U a O W J w O LL A O O a O i N s O O W I O .E 3 N m FDA S O O N L O co 's N N 3 ►7 m 0 o +� O 7 O E O L d Q E U 'i y y ccm m cc o c U C W 3 ++ C O cu lL fn _ m y 2 R m i O O to C E L !0 L { — O E ~ O O a a (O X L cc y 'o m O W ❑ ❑ O C.)U o oi L U o N Z S y O OC Z is c O CU +� 0 O a O ii � a ai c v co Z o 0. W. O U c 2 o w *' o N1 s V c O E y y co a U z c 0 cu z W O C1 d O O L C O a a O a u� aD w a a� y s a a� cc 3 a N cc w d J Z M U C O co 7 co W O cu U 73 a O U O A LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Qualifications of Project Key Personnel - FORM E (Must submit within 48 hours following Bid Submittal) Email to: phintz@rentonwa.gov PROJECT MANAGER Name: Current Position with Company: Years' Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 1 of 2 Qualifications of Project Key Personnel — FORM E LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Qualifications of Project Key Personnel - FORM E (Must submit within 48 hours following Bid Submittal) Email to: phintz@rentonwa.gov SUPERINTENDENT Name: Current Position with Company: Years' Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. ❑ If performed with different firm list the firm name. Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect/Engineer: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: End of Form Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 2 of 2 Qualifications of Project Key Personnel — FORM E LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Contract Bond - FORM F • CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, (CONTRACTOR/PRINCIPAL) of[address] as PRINCIPAL, and (SURETY) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of as a SURETY corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become SURETY upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as SURETY, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton (CITY/OWNER) in the sum of US Dollars ($ ) Total Contract Amount, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our heirs, successors, assigns, executors, administrators and personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into pursuant to the laws of the State of Washington and the ordinances of the City of Renton. Dated at , Washington, this day of , 20 NOW, THEREFORE THE CONDITIONS OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION ARE AS FOLLOWS: WHEREAS, under and pursuantto Contract No. CAG-25-257 providingfor construction of the Legacy Square - Phase 2; the PRINCIPAL has accepted, or is about to accept, the Contract, and undertake to perform the Work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth. The SURETY indemnifies, defends, and protects and holds the CITY/OWNER, its officers, agents, and assigns harmless from and against all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment, and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and reimbursing and paying CITY/OWNER all expenses that CITY/OWNER may incur in making good any default by PRINCIPAL; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, (or the subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors material persons, and all persons who shall supply such contractor or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns (or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to faithfully perform the Contract. The indemnities to CITY/OWNER shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other design professionals retained by OWNER in connection with the Project. No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect SURETY's obligation on the Contract Bond. SURETY , for value received, hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or the Work to be performed thereunder and agrees that modifications and changes to the terms and conditions of the Contract that increase the total amount to be paid the PRINCIPAL shall automatically increase the obligation of the SURETY on this Contract Bond and notice to SURETY is not required for such increased obligation. Legacy Square - Phase 2 Page 1 of 2 Contract Bond - FORM F LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 Contract Bond - FORM F • This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and venue shall be in King County, Washington. FURTHERMORE, this Contract Bond shall be satisfied and released only upon the conditions that PRINCIPAL or SURETY: • Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by CITY/OWNER in the manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract; • Pay, in accordance with Chapters 39.08, 39.12 and 60.28 Revised Code of Washington (RCW), the sums due all workers, laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material suppliers, and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials for carrying on of such work under the Contract; • Pay alltaxes, increases and penalties, if any, incurred on or related to the Contract under Titles 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and any and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW or any other law; • Receives a written discharge/release of bond from CITY, signed by the Mayor or by a duly authorized representative of CITY. This Contract Bond shall be executed in two (2) original counterparts, and shall be signed by the parties' duly authorized officers. This Contract Bond will only be accepted if is accompanied by a fully executed and original power of attorney for the office executing on behalf of the SURETY. PRINCIPAL SURETY [PRINCIPAL] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Printed Name] [Title] [Date] Name and address of local office of agent and/or Surety company: Telephone: Legacy Square - Phase 2 Contract Bond - FORM F [SURETY] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Printed Name] [Title] [Date] 03/08/2022 F clb Page 2 of 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 10 00 —SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of contract. 3. Permits, fees and bonds. 4. Work sequence 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Contractor use of site and premises. 7. Work restrictions. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.3. PROJECT A. Project Name: Legacy Square - Phase 2 1. Owner's Name: City of Renton 2. Architect's Name: Mithun 3. The Project consists of the following: a. Construction of a fully enclosed, freestanding stage with audio and visual components installed and operational; installation of a bathroom; and all related work. In addition, the work includes installation of electrical systems for Legacy Square - Phase 1 (park site improvements) and Phase 2 (stage) for the City of Renton, Washington, all as shown and described on the Contract Documents dated, September 8, 2025. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.4. CONTRACT DESCRIPTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Contract Type: Single General Construction Contract based on a single lump -sum price as described in Division 00 11 13 —Advertisement for Bids. 1.5. PERMITS, FEES AND BONDS A. The Owner will obtain and pay for the following permits prior to a Notice to Proceed. Permits obtained: City of Renton Building Permit and City of Renton Land Use Permit. The Contractor shall follow all Provisions noted on the Approvals and Permits. Copies of the Approvals and Permits are available from the Owner. B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all Plumbing, Electrical, Traffic Control Plan and other Building Permits as required by the City of Renton and other regulatory agencies. 1.6. WORK SEQUENCE A. The work will be a single project with Notice to Proceed and Substantial Completion dates. 1. Work period from Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion. 2. Anticipated Notice to Proceed: October 20, 2025 3. Substantial Completion Date: March 20, 2026. B. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the contract time. 1.7. OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct roads, sidewalks, or driveways without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8. CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Others. 2. Work by Owner. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET C. Provide access to and from site as required by law. 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. D. SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS 1. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts. Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions. 2. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 3. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule. 4. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 5. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 6. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 7. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. E. WORK RESTRICTIONS 1. Hours of Operation: Per City of Renton Municipal Code 4-4-030 C.: Commercial, multi- family, new single family and other nonresidential construction activities shall be restricted to the hours between seven o'clock (7:00) a.m. and eight o'clock (8:00) p.m., Monday through Friday. Haul hours shall be restricted to the hours between eight -thirty (8:30) a.m. and three -thirty (3:30) p.m., Monday through Friday, and work on Saturdays shall be restricted to the hours between nine o'clock (9:00) and seven o'clock (7:00), unless otherwise approved in advance by the Owner. 2. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. a. Provide Owner not less than 72 hours' notice in advance of proposed utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 3. Contractor will coordinate construction activities, including all deliveries and equipment movement with the Owner's Staff, and others as required before commencing activities in the construction area. Contractor will notify Owner of any planned construction activities in the areas of the parking lots, roadways, or other areas of the park ten (10) calendar days before scheduled activities. 4. Other Restriction per Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 1130 — HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for hazardous materials. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, applyto this Section. 1.3. NOT USED 1.4. CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION A. Contractor to provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended to be used during execution of the project, including storage Locations. 1.5. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is encountered during execution of the Work. The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification procedure for its abatement by the Contractor. B. Compliance with Regulations: All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements. The disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable federal, state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 01 11 30 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 14 00 — WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, applyto this Section. 1.2. USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways and sidewalks clear and available to Owner and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of roadways and to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. b. Maintain site fencing. Protect existing conditions and areas to remain. B. Work Hours: 1. Weekdays (Monday through Friday): 7 a.m. to 8 p.m. 2. Haul Activities: 8:30 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. 3. Weekends: a. Saturday: 9 a.m. to 8 p.m. b. Sunday and Holidays (City of Renton official recognized): No work permitted. 1.3. NOISE CONTROL A. Meet all requirements of WAC 173-60-040. Maintain the level of construction noise inside adjacent buildings from exceeding a dB(A) 60 curve (with windows closed). B. Meet all requirements of the City of Renton Municipal Code. C. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: The noise level of each piece of equipment shall not be greater than 85 dB(A) at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisier operating conditions. Provide rubber -tired equipment whenever possible instead of metal- tracked equipment. Mufflers for stationary engines shall provide hospital -area silencing quality. D. Air Compressors: Equip air compressors with silencing packages. Electric -driven compressors are preferred. WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 20 00 — PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Modification procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. See General Conditions all requirements pertaining to retainage. 1.3. SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Format: On 8-1/2" X 11" paper. B. Forms filled out by hand will not beaccepted. C. Submit printed schedule on form acceptable to the Owner. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit for Owner approval, electronic format of Schedule of Values, a minimum of 15 days before first Application for Payment submittal. Approved Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner as the basis for progress payments. E. Format: Schedule of Values shall breakdown the total Contract Sum to each category of work utilizing the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. 1. Site mobilization shall not exceed 5% of Contract Sum. 2. Construction closeout shall not be less than 3% of Contract Sum. 3. For each line item exceeding 5% of Contract Sum, show breakdown by major products and operations. 4. Cross reference Schedule of Values amounts to the Construction Progress Schedule scheduled tasks with specified in Section 01 32 16 — Construction Schedule. 5. Round figures to nearest dollar amount. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 6. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 7. Major cost items, which are not directly a cost of actual work -in -place, such as distinct temporary facilities, may be either shown as items in schedule of values or included in General Conditions, mobilization and/or demobilization at Contractor's option. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Order Proposals (COP), with each Application for Payment. 1.4. APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, if not stipulated, at monthly intervals. B. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit approved Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms for Contractor and all subcontractors. Without exception, processing of an Application for Payment will not begin until approved copies are on file with Owner for each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed by Contractor or subcontractors included in that Application. 1. Submit a list of all subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Submit instructions to Owner for the disposition of retainage funds. a. In accordance with chapter 60.28 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW), Owner shall reserve a contract retainage not to exceed Five percent,(unless ten percent retainage is held under RCW 39.08.010 (3) of the moneys earned by Contractor as trust fund for the protection and payment of: (1) The claims of any person and Owner arising in accordance with the Contract Documents. (2) The state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which maybe due from such Contractor. b. The funds held in retainage shall be held until forty-five (45) days following Final Acceptance subject to the provisions of chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW. C. Contractor's written instructions should be addressed to the Owner with a copy to the Architect/Engineer. d. At the option of Contractor, the moneys reserved by Owner shall be either: (1) Retained in a fund by Owner. (2) Bonded for all or any portion of the contract retainage in a form acceptableto Owner; or (3) Deposited in an interest -bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association. (4) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET (a) Escrow Agent: If the retained funds are to be placed in escrow, Contractorwill select the escrow agent, subject to approval by Owner. The selected agent must be a bank or trust company in the State of Washington. (b) Pursuant to electing the escrow option, an escrow agreement shall be executed by Contractor, Owner, and bank. Three copies of the agreement should be completed and executed by Contractor and returned to Owner for joint execution, who in turn will forward all copies to the bank for receipt and acceptance. The bank will retain one copy and return one copy each to Contractor and Owner. A completed and signed escrow agreement must be on file with Owner for payment before Contractor's first application isprocessed. (c) Escrow Payments: As each progress estimate is presented for payment, Contractor shall make a vouchered request for the retained funds that are to be placed in escrow. Upon receiving a retainage invoice, Owner will issue a check payable to Contractor and the bank jointly. Such checks will be mailed to the bank and Contractor will receive copies of check transmittal letters. (d) Escrow Investments: The bank shall invest the retained funds in bonds and other securities selected by Contractor from the following list approved by Owner: (i) Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States. (ii) Other obligations of the United States or its agencies. (iii) Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States. (iv) Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association. (v) Time deposits in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (e) Deposits in savings accounts in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (f) The investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the contract, including extensions thereof or forty-five (45) days following the Final Acceptance of the improvement or work. Interest on such investments shall be paid to Contractor as it accrues. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET (g) Escrow Costs and Fees: All escrow costs and fees shall be paid by Contractor, in accordance with the Escrow Agreement. (h) Release of Escrow Investments to Contractor: Upon Final Acceptance and the expiration of forty-five (45) days following the date of Acceptance, and contingent upon Contractor's compliance with provisions of the public works statutes, Owner will issue written instructions to the bank to release to Contractor the investment held in escrow. If there should be either unpaid taxes or other unsatisfied claims against the retained percentage, the provisions of the Escrow Agreement will govern. C. Submit draft Application for Payment to Owner for approval 10 days prior to submittal of actual Application for Payment. D. Present required information in digital form. E. Form: As approved by the Owner F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. Submit one signed digital image of each Application for Payment. Include the following with the application: Construction progress schedule revised and current as specified in Section 01 3216. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off -site stored products if any. 4. Statements of Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages as documented by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for each contractor or subcontractor included on the Pay Application. 5. List with Contractor, sub -contractors, and all sub -sub -contractors invoice amounts, UBI number, and Affidavit of Intent's number. 6. Copies of Certified Payroll from Contractor and all sub -contractors. K. When Owner requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.5. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Owner will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Owner's standard form. B. For other required changes, Owner will issue a Field Authorization (FA) signed by the Owner, A/E and Contractor instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. The document will describe the required changes, will identify an initial estimate of the probable cost of any changes, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Owner will issue a request for Change Order Proposal (COP) that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 5 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Owner, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with fulldocumentation. E. Computation of Change in Contract Sum: Will be as specified in the Agreement and the General Conditions. 1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 3. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET C. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. f. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarlydocumented. 2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.6. APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. Closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Contractor's Certification of Payment of Debts Claims. 3. Contractor's Certificate of Release of Liens. 4. Owner's approval of Closeout submittals specified in Section 01 78 00. 5. Completion of punchlist with Owner's approval. 6. Completion of all Change Orders. 7. Submittal of Affidavit of wages paid for Contractor and subcontractors. 8. L&I release. 9. Sign -off of all required permits. 10. Posting of Certificate of Occupancy. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 21 00—PREVAILING WAGE RATES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. This project, located in King County Washington, is subject to the payment of prevailing wages to all workers. It is the contractor's responsibility to determine and use the applicable rates for the appropriate area of the state, as published by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. These rates are available on the web at https://Lni.wa.gov/licensing-permits/ public-works-projects/prevailing- wage-rates/. 1. Contractor must include these provisions in all subcontracts for work performed under this Contract. B. Based in the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this project is the posted bid date. Upon written request, the Owner will mail a hard copy of the applicable prevailing wages for this project. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PREVAILING WAGE RATES 01 21 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 30 00 —ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Administration and supervisory personnel. B. Communication procedures. C. Project meetings. D. Preconstruction meeting. E. Site mobilization meeting. F. Progress meetings. G. Coordination procedures. H. Submittal Types. I. Submittals for review and information. J. Number of copies of submittals. K. Submittal procedures. L. Daily Progress reports. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy. C. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. D. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. F. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.3. SUBMITTALS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel. B. Coordination drawings. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at progress meeting intervals, as approved by Owner and Architect/Engineer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 3.2. COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES A. General 1. Address all Project correspondence through Owner. Do not contact Owner's consultants directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the Owner, Architect/Engineer, or Architect/Engineer's sub consultants. 2. Owner will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be recognized. Owner to coordinate all decisions and communications with the Architect/Engineer. Owner will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor. a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meetingminutes. 3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project title and number on all correspondence. B. Requests for Information 1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Architect/Engineer or Architect/Engineer's sub consultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI) to the Owner. 2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name and number. b. RFI number (three digits, beginning with 001). C. Date of request. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET d. Date of required response. e. Subject title. f. Initiator of request. g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification). h. Location on site. i. Description of issue. j. Contractor's proposed solution, if known. k. Cost impacts, if known. 1. Space adequate for Architect/Engineer's review acknowledgement and reply. 3. Provide only one question per RFI. 4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence. 5. Allow 10 working days for Owner to issue response. 6. Owner reserves the right to deny any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract Documents. 3.3. PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Meeting 1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed. 2. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect/Engineer and selected consultants. C. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, QAM, and major site related subcontractors. d. City Parks, Facilities, and Development Services staff. 3. Agenda: a. Distribution of Contract Documents. b. Designation of project personnel. C. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, and substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout. d. Scheduling, early occupancy. e. Working hours. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. g. Construction related air quality control procedures. h. Safety. i. Security. j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability. 4. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect/Engineer and Contractor for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. B. Progress Meetings 1. Attend progress meetings at approved intervals or as required by the Owner and Architect/Engineer. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of applications for payment. 2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings. 3. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect/Engineer and required sub consultants. C. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent. d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, Manufacturers Representatives, and Consultants. 4. Agenda: a. Safety Report. b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve. C. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule. e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions. f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potentialfor impeding planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules. g. Review Non -conforming work and status of correction. h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. i. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. j. Review Requests for Information status. k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress schedule. M. Maintenance of quality and work standards. n. Other business relating to Work. 5. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect/Engineer and Contractor for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. a. Required performance results. b. Protection of construction and personnel. 3.4. COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work, with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others. B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved, describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their work is required. C. Coordination Meetings: Owner will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress and pre -installation meetings. 1. Required Attendees: a. Architect/Engineer and Architect/Engineer's consultants, as required b. Contractor C. Superintendent d. Subcontractors e. Suppliers f. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. 2. Agenda: a. Scheduling. b. Interface requirements. C. Off -site fabrication. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON d. Access requirements. e. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. g. Quality standards. 3.5. SUBMITTALTYPES SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable, manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions; factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copyto identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. B. Shop Drawings: Project -specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings, dimensions (field and factory), roughing -in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination requirements, and other project -specific information. C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns. D. Samples for Verification: Project -specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns. E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 32 16. F. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or person. G. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer, manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's Letterhead. Submit welding certificates on AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of materials or products for compliance with requirements. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project. K. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. L. Project Record Documents, Operation & Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: 1. Combination of submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 7800. M. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner. N. Others as indicated. 3.6. SUBMITTALS FOR OWNER'S REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Schedules. 6. Qualification Data. 7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals, etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections. B. Submit to Owner for reviewforthe limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.7. SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Permits. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.8. NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Owner. Access to the document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy. B. At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage device acceptable to the Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and one physical copy of all project submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs, titles, and edge identification. C. Superintendents Daily Report 1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report concerning events at the Project site as follows: a. List of subcontractors on site. b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities. C. Equipment on site. d. Material deliveries. e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. f. Accidents. g. Meetings and significant decisions. h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below. i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. j. Emergency procedures. k. Orders and requests of authorities havingjurisdiction. 1. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented. M. Change Orders received and implemented. n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered undersame. o. Services connected and disconnected. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET p. Equipment or system tests and startups. Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner at Progress Meetings. 2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the Owner within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 32 16 —CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: For work sequence, Owner occupancy, and Owner - furnished items. C. Section 01 20 00 - Payment Procedures: For schedule of values. D. Section 01 30 00 —Administrative Requirements: For superintendent's daily progress reports. 1.3. REFERENCES A. Comply with AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America; 2004. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Construction Progress Schedule: Indicate complete construction sequence, from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion. 1. Submit within 7 days of Notice to Proceed. 2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 3. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 1. Break down work so that no activity is longer than 21 days, unless specifically allowed by Owner. 2. List submittals, materials and installation as separate line items. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. List all permit submittals showing submittal and anticipated issuance dates. 4. List all Owner supplied material delivery dates on schedule. 5. List all Work by Owner completion dates on schedule. B. Identify each activity by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Indicate procurement activities for long -lead and major items, including submittal, approval, and fabrication activities. See Section 01 30 00 for submittal review durations. E. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00. F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification, and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using the current approved schedule to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 3.2. BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first workday of each week. 3.3. REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Owner and Architect/Engineer at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days. 3.4. UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3.5. DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to General Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect/Engineer and to the Owner. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 35 73 - DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for delegated design indicated in the various Sections of these Specifications. B. Section Includes: Structural and other design requirements for delegated design components. C. This Section applies to Technical Specification Sections, and supplements requirements indicated in the General and Supplementary Conditions. D. Delegated design does not mean deferred submittal. See Drawings for deferred submittals. E. Related Requirements: 1. Refer to the following sections for specific delegated design requirements with deferred submittal: a. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for the following applications where required by Code and not detailed in Structural Drawings: a. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions, overhead doors and other various applications. b. Canopies. C. Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings". d. Section 06 17 19 "Cross -Laminated Timber" for erection, including rigging and bracing. e. Section 06 18 11 "Glued -Laminated Timber Framing" for erection, including rigging and bracing. f. Section 07 41 13.16 "Standing Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panels". g. Section 08 33 23 "Overhead Coiling Doors" for attachment to structure. h. Section 08 35 13 "Folding Doors" for attachment to structure. i. Section 10 28 00 "Restroom Accessories" for attachment of grab bars to structure. j. Division 22 "Plumbing" Sections for hangers, supports, vibration and seismic controls for plumbing piping and equipment. k. Division 23 "HVAC" Sections for hangers, supports, vibration and seismic controls for HVAC piping and equipment. I. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for hangers, supports, vibration and seismic controls for electrical and low -voltage equipment. M. Division 27 "Communications" Sections for hangers, supports, vibration and seismic controls for communications equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Approval Stamp: Certification obtained by the Contractor that the AHJ has reviewed deferred DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 35 73 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET submittal and finds it acceptable with respect to applicable regulatory requirements. B. AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction): Such state, county and municipal building officials, building inspectors or plan reviewers who are charged with the enforcement of state, county and municipal laws, enforcement of the requirements of a Code or standard, and/ or approvals for equipment, materials, an installation, and/ or a procedure. C. Bidder -Design: Design services provided by a manufacturer or installer complying with quality assurance, performance requirements and design requirements indicated and established by the Contract Documents. Bidder -design does not require Professional Engineering, except as indicated. D. Deferred Submittal: Those portions or elements of a complete design that are not submitted at the time of the permit application and that are to be submitted to the AHJ for approval within a specified period after a building permit has been issued. 1. For horizontal structural framing members (e.g. wood trusses, wood I -joists, steel joists, precast concrete tees), if indicated to be deferred submittal, manufacturers shall be approved fabricators as defined in IBC Section 1704.2.5.1 or equivalent article in relevant, local Code. 2. Where connections to structure are allowed to be part of a deferred submittal, the permitted drawings for the supporting structure shall have the loads and reactions with their locations identified, as described in step 4 of the procedure section of this document E. Delegated Design: Design work for portions or elements of a complete design that are performed by a registered design professional other than the registered design professional in responsible charge of that aspect of the project. 1. Where occurs, contractor -design, fabricator -design, bidder -design or bidder design -build shall have same meaning as delegated design. 2. Delegated design does not include professional services required of the Contractor to fulfill their responsibilities under the Contract including but not limited to construction means, methods and sequence. Examples that are not considered delegated design include design of excavation shoring, design of formwork supports and shoring, design of tower crane foundations, etc. F. Seal: Certification that delegated design plans, computations and specifications were designed and prepared under the direct supervision of the Architect or Engineer whose name appears thereon. 1.4 DEFERRED SUBMITTAL, DELEGATED DESIGN AND BIDDER -DESIGN SERVICES A. Deferred Submittal: Where referenced in these specifications, deferred submittal portions or elements and their installation shall comply with the currently adopted edition of all applicable state and local ordinates, with parameters specified in this and individual sections. 1. Drawings, calculations and specifications for deferred submittal items shall be submitted to the AHJ after having been reviewed for conformance with the design by the Architect and/ or Professional Engineer. 2. The Architect and/ or Professional Engineer shall provide a notation on all deferred submittal documents that acknowledges review of such documents prior to submitting them to the AHJ. Including separate submittals on the deferred submittal list is acceptable. 3. The deferred portion or element shall have approval by the AHJ prior to fabrication, erection, construction, or installation in the field. B. Delegated Design: Where referenced in these specifications, delegated design portions or elements and their attachments to the structure shall comply with the currently adopted edition of all applicable state and local ordinances, with parameters as specified in this individual sections. DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 35 73 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Design services and certifications required for delegated design shall be provided by a Professional Engineer registered as such in the State where the Project is located. Delegated design portions or elements shall comply with quality assurance, performance requirements and design requirements indicated and established by the Contract Documents. C. Bidder -Design: Where referenced in these specifications, Bidder -Design components and installation shall comply with the currently adopted edition of all applicable state and local ordinates, with parameters specified in this and individual sections. D. Permitting Agency Requirements: Follow the requirements for permits and deferred submittals current at the time of submission. The General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and submitting all documentation materials required, related to Delegated Design components, such that the AHJ's review will not adversely affect the construction schedule. At or near time of original permit application, the General Contractor shall meet with the AHJ to identify Delegated Design components and confirm the procedure for how they are to be submitted and processed for permits. E. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Where required by the AHJ for delegated design components, submit complete Submittals to meet permitting agency requirements for permits. Include drawings and calculations for that portion of the Work signed and sealed by a registered engineer in the State where the Project is located. Incomplete submittals or submittals not previously reviewed and so stamped by General Contractor will not be accepted for review by the Architect or Engineer of Record. B. These submittal requirements are in addition to other submittal requirements stated elsewhere in the contract documents. 1.6 INSURANCES A. Refer to General Conditions for Insurance and Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORK INCLUDED A. General: Certain of the components of the Work under this project are Delegated Design. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete responsibility for the design, calculations, submittals, fabrication, transportation and installation of the Delegated Design portions or components as required in this Section. B. The General Contractor is responsible to submit all documents required by the permitting agency for the separate approval and permit for each Delegated Design item. Delegated Design components of this Work are defined as complete, operational systems, provided for their intended use. C. All permit plan review and permit fees for Delegated Design items are the responsibility of the submitting General Contractor. DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 35 73 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.2 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED A. General: Delegated Design documents and related permits issuance must be completed prior to fabrication. The General Contractor must complete and submit a Contractor Design Summary Sheet listing Delegated Design Subcontractors and their registered engineer's names and phone numbers prior to submission of the Delegated Design documents for review. B. Scope of Documents: Delegated Design components are shown and/ or indicated in the Contract Documents for design intent. The purpose is to have the General Contractor responsible to provide, coordinate and install each Delegated Design component. 1. Delegated Design components attached to the structural frame or supplemental to the structural frame shall be designed for the anticipated loads as outlined in the Contract Documents. These Delegated Design components are all to be coordinated with appropriate subcontractors. 2. Load reactions at the interface between the Delegated Design components and the structural frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by the Architect and Engineer of Record. C. Component Certification: Certify that mechanical and electrical components comply with the structural provisions of all applicable codes. 1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all attachments to the structure for all elements requiring structural design per these specifications. These attachments include, but are not limited to, structural bracing for equipment, conveyances, and architectural components; seismic restraints of vibration isolation systems; and details of lateral bracing and attachment systems designed to accommodate differential movement between building levels. 2. Shop Drawings shall be sealed by the Professional Engineer responsible for their design. D. Quality Assurance Plan: Submit a quality assurance plan for the designated structural system of all elements requiring structural design per these specifications. Quality assurance plan shall comply with Owner's requirements and all applicable Codes. END OF SECTION DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 35 73 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET SECTION 01 4000—QUALITYREQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection agencies and services. F. Control of installation. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. I. Defect Assessment. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 0142 00 - Definitions. 1.3. REFERENCE STANDARDS 0140 00 — QUALITY REQUIREMENTS. A. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1.4. DEFINITIONS A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work used to evaluate that actual product incorporated into the Work comply with requirements. Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect/Engineer. 1.5. SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures. B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that materials, products, workmanship, on -site and off -site fabrication, construction, and operations are in compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function as a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will include the following: Qualification Data: For Contractor -provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report performed by a recognized authority. 2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular form and include the following: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Description of test or inspection. C. Identification of applicable standards. d. Identification of test and inspection methods. e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required. f. Time schedule (or time span) for tests and inspections. g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. h. Requirements for obtaining samples. i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service. 3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-monthly intervals. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, Licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated performance and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include the list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers, fabricators, specialists, or factory -authorized service representatives, provide entities with the following qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Afirm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated forthis Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 5. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.7. QUALITY CONTROL SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the drawings. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing test results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency, Contractor shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing agency services. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8. SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Owner and Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions up to 10 days prior to bid opening date. Approved Substitutions will be listed on Addenda. B. Substitutions may be considered after bid opening only when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder/Contractor: Has investigated proposed substitution Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re - approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET All substitution requests shall be accompanied with the Substitution Request Form, completely filled out. Substitution Request Forms are found in the Specifications in Section 01 40 10. PART 2 — PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verifythat field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.2. MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock- ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects andworkmanship. B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Obtain Owner's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. Owner will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mock-up. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Make corrections as necessary until Owner's approval is issued. E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to remain, protect from all damage. G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.3. TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Tolerances will not be cumulative. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.4. TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. 3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 4. Test or inspection results. 5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for Payment. 3.5. TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 4. Promptly notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings. 7. Submit reports of alltests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work. 2. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. C. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 3. Schedule tests and inspections with Testing Agency. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Owner. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum. 3.6. MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.7. DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Maintain a Log of Non -conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution. 3.8. SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s) approved by Owner. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non -Conforming Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they impact quality assurance or quality control. B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports. Verification shall include a statement that all materials and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as noted. C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4010.10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE TO: CITY OF RENTON Project Manager Paul Hintz, Redevelopment Manager Email to: phintz@rentonwa.gov PROJECT NAME: CONTRACTOR: We hereby submit for consideration the following product instead of specified item for above project: Section Paragraph Proposed Substitution: Specified Item Attach complete dimensional information and technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications, which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality, performance, and appearance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality performance. Differences in quality of materials and construction shall be indicated. Fill in blanks below: A. Reason for substitution request: B. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings: Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes. Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 40 10.10 World Cup Legacy Square -Phase 1 August 29, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4010.10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM C. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the request substitution: Yes No Comment: D. What effect does this substitution have on other trades, other Contracts, and Contract completion date: E. What effect does this substitution have on applicable code requirements: F. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item: G. Manufacturer's guarantee of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (explain): H. List of names and addresses of three similar projects on which product was used, date of installation, and Architect/Engineer's name and address: I. Cost and supplier of specified product: Cost and supplier of proposed substitution product: The undersigned attests function and quality equivalent or superior to specified items. [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 40 10.10 World Cup Legacy Square -Phase 1 August 29, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4010.10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Submitted By: [Signature] [Firm] [Address] [Title] [Telephone] [Date] Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind the firm to the above term. A&E ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S RECOMMENDATION: Accepted: ❑ Accepted as Noted: ❑ Not Accepted: ❑ By: Date: Remarks: Concurrence by Architect/Engineer: Received Too Late: ❑ OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE: Accepted: ❑ Accepted as Noted: ❑ Not Accepted: ❑ Received Too Late: ❑ By: Date: Remarks: Concurrence byOwner: END OF SECTION Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 40 10.10 World Cup Legacy Square -Phase 1 August 29, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 0142 00 —DEFINITIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. In case of conflict, the General Conditions will take precedence. B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.3. SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. Specifications Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 2016 Master Format and City of Rentonstandards B. Specification Content: 1. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: a. Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes incomplete sentences. (1) Abbreviated word and terms shall be interpolated as sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable to the context indicated. b. These specifications are written in imperative mood. This imperative phraseology is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. C. The terms "Shall", "Shall be", "Will", and "Will be" and similar words and phrases are defined to have compulsory meaning. 2. Assignment of Specialists: a. The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialist must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the responsibility for DEFINITIONS 01 42 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. b. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. C. Use of titles such as "carpentry" in not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. d. The term "Installer" shall be used to refer to all specialists. 1.4. DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Terminology - Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as follows: 1. Addenda: Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete, or add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents. 2. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Owner's response or submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning will be held to the limitations of the Owner's responsibilities and duties as specified in Section 00 72 00, General Conditions of the Contract. 3. Confirm: Confirm or verify dimension or condition and notify Owner of findings prior to proceeding with the work. 4. Construction Documents: All of the written and graphic documents prepared and assembled by the Owner for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the following categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, and conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with "contract documents". 5. Contract Documents: The legally enforceable requirements which become part of the contract when the agreement is signed. Including the bid package, project manual and all related documents including construction documents. See "construction documents" above. 6. Contract Modifications - After agreement has been signed, any additions, deletions, or modifications to the work are accomplished by supplemental instructions or change order. 7. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "permitted", "required", and DEFINITIONS 01 42 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET "accepted" mean "directed by the Owner ", "requested by the Owner ", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect/Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. 8. Drawings: Graphic representations of the work. 9. Furnish: To supply and deliver to project site, unload, and inspect for damage. 10. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, anchor, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, protect, and similar operations and make ready for use. 11. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub- subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections, applications, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. 12. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re -used materials or equipment. 13. Project Manual: The book -sized (8 1/2 by 11-inch format and bound) volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications. 14. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the project is built. 15. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 16. Record Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes, including nature and location of concealed work. 17. Shop Drawings: Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe fabrication and installation of elements of the work. 18. Specifications: Define the qualitative requirements for products, materials and workmanship upon which the contract is based. 19. Supply: Same as Furnish. 20. Testing Agency: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, both at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and, if required, to interpret the results of those inspections or tests. DEFINITIONS 01 42 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET DEFINITIONS 01 42 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0143 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING SECTION 01 43 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Special inspections shall conform to Chapter 17 of the International Building Code and the referenced codes and standards listed herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes code -required special inspection and testing requirements for the following items: 1. Soils. 2. Fabrication. 3. Concrete. 4. Wood. 5. Fire-resistant penetrations and joints. 6. Seismic resistance of nonstructural components. 1.3 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS A. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI318-19. B. International Building Code, 2021 IBC. C. Qualification of Post -Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete, ACI 355.4-19. D. Qualification of Post -Installed MechanicalAnchors in Concrete, ACI 355.2-19. E. Special Design Provisions for Wind & Seismic, AWC SDPWS-2021. F. Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts, RCSC-2014. G. Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1- 2015. H. Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, AWS D1.3-2008. I. Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel Including Metal Inserts and Connections In Reinforced Concrete Construction, AWS D1.4 - 2018. J. Structural Welding Code- Seismic Supplement, AWS D1.8 - 2016. Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 43 43 -1 Legacy Square - Phase 2 September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0143 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. ACI:American Concrete Institute. B. AWC:American Wood Council. C. AWS:American Welding Society. D. Building Official: The officer or other designated authority charged with the administration and enforcement of the building code. E. Continuous Special Inspection: Special inspection by the Special Inspector who is present when and where the work to be inspected is being performed. F. ICC: International Code Council. G. IAPMO:International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. H. Observe: Where noted in the Special Inspection tables at the end of this Section, the Special Inspector shall observe these items on a random basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. Perform: Where noted in the Special Inspection tables at the end of this Section, the Special Inspector shall perform these tasks for each elements. J. Periodic Special Inspection: Special inspection by the Special Inspector who is intermittently present where the work to be inspected has been or is being performed. K. RCSC: Research Council on Structural Connections. L. Special Inspector: A qualified person employed or retained by a Special Inspection and Testing Agency and approved by the Building Official as having the competence necessary to inspect a particular type of construction requiring special inspection. 0. WABO: Washington Association of Building Officials. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTAL$ A. Qualification Data: For Special Inspection and Testing Agency and associated personnel. Qualification Data shall include a copy of the scope of accreditation. B. Field quality -control reports: The Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall furnish inspection and test reports for each inspection and test to the Building Official, Structural Engineer of Record, Architect, Contractor and Owner. 1. Final Report: The Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall submit a final report stating that the work requiring special inspection was inspected and is in conformance with the approved construction documents and that all discrepancies noted in the inspection reports have been corrected. Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 43 43 - 2 Legacy Square - Phase 2 September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0143 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING C. Statement of Contractor Responsibility: For seismic design category D structures, the Contractor is responsible for the construction of the main wind or seismic force - resisting system or a wind or seismic force -resisting component listed in herein. The Contractor shall submit a written statement of responsibility to the Building Official and the Owner prior to commencement of work on the system or component. The Contractor's Statement of Responsibility shall contain the following: 1. Acknowledgement of awareness of the special requirements contained in the statement of special inspections. 2. Acknowledgement that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construction documents approved by the Building Official. 3. Procedures for exercising control within the Contractor's organization. The method and frequency of reporting and distribution of the reports. 4. Identification and qualification of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the organization. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 (concrete), ASTM D3740 (soils), ASTM E329 (materials) and ASTM E543 (non-destructive) for testing indicated. B. Welding Inspector Qualifications: AWSD1.1,Section6.1.4.1(1)and WABO. C. Mechanical Post -installed Anchor Inspector Qualifications: Certified by the ACI Post - installed Anchor Inspector program (ACI CPP 681.2) or other approved program with equivalent requirements. D. Adhesive Post -installed Anchor Inspector Qualifications: Certified by the ACI Adhesive Anchor Installation Inspector program (ACI CPP 681.1), ACI Post -installed Concrete Anchor Installation Inspector program (ACI CPP 681.2) or other approved program with equivalent requirements. E. Geotechnical Engineer Qualifications: A Professional Engineer licensed in the State where the project is located and qualified according to ASTM D3740. 1.7 FIELDCONDITIONS A. The construction or work for which special inspection or testing is required shall remain accessible and exposed for special inspection or testing purposes until completion of the required special inspections or tests. 1.8 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct conference at Project site. Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 43 43 - 3 Legacy Square - Phase 2 September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0143 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING B. Coordinate attendance of representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete, including the following: 1. General Contractor's Superintendent. 2. Owner or Owner's Representative 3. Architect. 4. Structural Engineer. 5. Special Inspector. 6. Building Official. C. Review the following: 1. Special inspection requirements of the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS ANDTESTING A. Special Inspectors from the Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall observe the indicated work for compliance with the approved construction documents. 1. All discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Contractor for correction and noted in the field quality -control reports. 2. Issues requiring immediate corrective actions or engineering input are to be brought to the engineer's attention immediately upon discovery. B. Special Inspections and Testing Schedule: Refer to the tables at the end of this Section for required special inspections and testing. C. Concrete Testing Requirements: Concrete testing indicated at the end of this section meets the minimum requirements for structural testing to be provided by the Special Testing and Inspecting Agency. Additional testing for construction consideration is not indicated in the tables and shall be determined by the Contractor and provided at the Contractor's expense. Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 43 43 - 4 Legacy Square - Phase 2 September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0143 43 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING D. Post -installed Anchor Inspection Requirements 1. Where periodic inspection is allowed in accordance with the anchor ICC/IAPMO evaluation report, inspections shall be as follows: a. For all anchors, prior to concealment, verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, anchor spacing and edge distances. b. For each anchor type and size, Special Inspector shall be onsite to continuously inspect a minimum of the first 10 anchors installed by each installer for conformance with ICC/IAPMO evaluation report. Provided all anchors are installed correctly per the manufacturer's written instructions, provide periodic inspection on a minimum of 10-percent of the next 1000 anchors by each installer and a minimum of 5-percent of the remaining anchors by each installer. Inspections shall occur a minimum of once per week at a random time while anchor installation is ongoing. Any non-compliance issues shall reset the inspection requirements to 10 continuous inspections. Non -compliant anchors shall be brought to the attention of the Structural Engineer of Record for review and shall be brought into compliance by either testing or re -installation. C. Inspection reports shall identify names of installers. d. Special Inspector shall provide documentation at the end of anchor installations stating that the minimum number of anchors were inspected. END OF SECTION 014343 Contract No. CAG-25-257 01 43 43 - 5 Legacy Square - Phase 2 September 8, 2025 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET SECTION 0150 00 —TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.3. TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner, Architect/Engineer, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor. 1.4. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization. 1.5. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities for use during construction operations. Do not use public facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.6. BARRIERS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.7. FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll -up type fencing is allowed. B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. Installfencing around entire Project site when under construction. 1.8. CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plan for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting all Work required under the Contract. Maintain materials and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective materials and equipment and uses made thereof. B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work. Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations. 1.9. SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.10. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking areas, park roads, private property, and city streets. D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations. E. Traffic Control Plan: Contractor will prepare, obtain and maintain a Traffic Control Plan approval and permit from the City of Renton for all work associated with S 3rd St TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON and work for the project. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET F. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to existing pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Do not park vehicles in traffic Lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic control signs and devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries. Storage of materials adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless authorized by the Owner. G. No vehicle and equipment access or parking shall be allowed within Seattle Public Utilities (SPU) right of way unless received specific approval by SPU and the Owner. 1.11. WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removalfacilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on -site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.12. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. N/A 1.13. EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by Locations and classes of fire exposure. 1.14. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specify condition. 1.15. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. General: Comply with the following: a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". b. ANSI -Al 0 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition". 2. Recommendations: Referto "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations. 3. Electrical Service: Complywith NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.16. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safeand efficient manner. 2. Take necessary fire prevention measures. 3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's operations. 4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1.17. SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility connections, staging areas and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility provision. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 70 00 — EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre -installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. D. Section 01 78 00 — Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at completion. 1.3. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor (if used) B. Surveywork: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Submit digital record survey forthe project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building, site improvements, benchmarks, and utilities. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. C. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed. D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. 1.5. QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. Forfield engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Washington. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. B. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET C. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and Local regulations. 1.7. COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 Summary of Work for occupancy -related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or mis-fabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.3. PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre -installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Owner four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.4. LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Owner. G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.5. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.6. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Saw cut existing work smooth to avoid damage to existing work to remain. 3. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 4. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 5. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 6. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 7. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 8. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 9. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill: 1. To complete the work. 2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work. 3. To remove and replace defective or non -conforming work. 4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical, and other services. 6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work. 7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods, saw cutting, that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Cutting: Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure(s) with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations. 2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic hammering and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are durable and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. See City of Renton Standard Plans 103, 110, 110.1, 110.2, and 111. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 4. Match color, texture, and appearance. 5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.7. PROGRESS CLEANING SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. 3.8. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.9. CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy -related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. 3.10. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to complete each item and anticipated dates of completion. 1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollarvalue of Work remaining, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit substantial completion checklist. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with individual specification section requirements. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON and maintenance. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 11. Complete final cleaning requirements. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner and Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During inspection, Owner /Architect/Engineer will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as necessary to form the Owner's/Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List. The Owner's/Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List will subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Owner/Architect/Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on the Contractor's Punch List or the Owner's/ Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Re -inspection: If, following Owner's/Architect/Engineer's inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not granted, request re -inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all Substantial Completion re -inspections. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.11. FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 2. Submit copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification bythe QAM statingthat every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all accessory keys. 6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in technical specifications. 7. Submit pest -control final inspection report and certification. 8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements and notify Owner of their findings. Owner will certify Application for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for Final Completion re -inspections greater than one in number. C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.12. LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST) A. General: The QAM shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list. 3.13. FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean site: sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 -10 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 -11 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET SECTION 0174 00 — CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in Landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Treated wood. 5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 6. Glass. 7. Plastic sheeting. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166 codified in King County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, and City of Renton requirements pertaining to Legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.3. DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled, i.e. whether materials will be site -separated and self - hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. C. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party. C. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in Landfills or by incineration. 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). C. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.2. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Manager: Designate an on -site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Engineer. C. Instruction: Provide on -site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre -construction meeting. 2. Regularjob-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes accordingto applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On -Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off -site. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 01 78 00 —CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial Completion and Final Completions Checklists. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner/Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON C. Warranties and Bonds: SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future items. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 — PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full-size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets, "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda changes on the applicable drawing sheet or specification section. 2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Changes made by Change Order. d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 5. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate sheet numbers. C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets andtabs. 3.2. RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of selections made. 1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.3. RECORD PRODUCT DATA SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted and approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. 3.4. MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an organized and tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each. 3.5. O&M MANUALS, GENERAL A. Provide PDFfiles that are organized by section and file and fullytabbed and labeled. Provide files in original size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save files at a resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file sizes. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information furnished by multiple sources, assemble and coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant, inapplicable, or unnecessary information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation. The QAM is responsible for final assembly of manuals. B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to O&M Manuals that contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification Sections in which each system or subsystem is addressed. 3. List of Equipment: List equipmentfor each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Engineer. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals. F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Files: File type and format as approved by Owner. Documents shall be PDFs in 8-1/2-by- 11-inch format. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each file," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. Use layout supplied by Owner in electronic format approved by Owner. 2. Dividers: Reinforced heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1 -inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing sheet. Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files. 3.6. PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: Organize digital PDF manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.7. SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.8. WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic no -print -transfer -type covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents Listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 02 41 00 — SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Furnish all materials, equipment, labor, and related items necessary to complete the work shown on the Contract Drawings and/or Contract Specifications. The items of work to be performed shall include but are not limited to all items shown on Contract Drawings. In summary these include: 1. Selective site clearing & grubbing. 2. Protecting existing utilities, lighting, and services. 3. Protecting existing site elements to remain. 4. Remove select existing trees. 5. Protection of existing trees to remain. 6. Cap and abandon existing utilities per City of Renton standards. 7. Remove existing curbs, asphalt paving, and concrete paving. 8. Remove and salvage of existing site furnishings and light fixture items; and returning to City of Renton. 9. Salvage and store existing metal fencing for reuse. 10. Salvage existing trash can, parking signs, and boulders and store for reuse. 11. Remove existing catch basin and storm drainage lines, cap all lines abandoned in place and not removed, and note the precise location on the record drawings. 12. Remove existing stairs, railings, and concrete seating (including any footings). 13. Salvage and store all existing irrigation heads, vales, and spray bodies for reuse. 14. Cut, cap, and abandon in place or remove existing irrigation lines encountered as required for new construction. 15. Salvage and store existing light poles and junction boxes. 16. Cut, cap and abandon in place or remove existing electrical conduit lines encountered as required for new construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work in other sections of these Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Specification 01 50 00 —TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. 2. Specification 01 74 19—CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL. 3. Specification 31 10 00 —SITE PREPARATION. SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00-1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 4. Specification 31 23 13—SUBGRADE PREPARATION. 5. Specification 31 23 16 — EXCAVATION. 6. Specification 31 23 23.00 — FILL AND BACKFILL. 7. Specification 31 2323.15—TRENCH BACKFILL. 8. Specification 32 90 00 — PLANTING. 1.3 REFERENCES SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. This specification section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. 1. Specification Appendix C — Building Asbestos and Lead Assessment Report. 2. City of Renton Standard Details for removal, capping, and abandoning underground utility lines; most current version. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For the handling and disposal of Hazardous and/or Dangerous Waste materials the following requirements shall apply: The Contractor's disposal company and transporter shall have their TSD State and Federal Waste Generation ID's and shall be currently certified to handle the specified waste substances. 2. The Contractor or disposal sub -contractor shall be capable of both recycling of usable materials and recovery/disposal of Hazardous/Dangerous Waste substances. 3. Removal of Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) must be conducted by a State of Washington certified asbestos abatement contractor. 4. Comply with all rules, regulations, and requirements of the State of Washington Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA), Washington State Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA), Puget Sound Clean Air Authority (PSCAA), Washington State Department of Ecology (DOE) and the Washington State Department of Laborand Industries (L&I) for asbestos abatement and removal of lead. Refer to Appendix C Building Asbestos and Lead Assessment Report. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit copy of State of Washington Asbestos Abatement Certification prior to removal of ACM. B. Disposal Certification per section 3.12 B. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protective cover and barriers as necessary to prevent damage and straining to all existing site improvements to remain during construction. SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Install temporary erosion control facilities and tree protection prior to commencing demolition operations in accordance with Specification 01 50 00 and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide Tree Protection in accordance as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3. Contact respective utility maintenance agencies to verify location of active utilities prior to excavation. Keep active utilities intact and in continuous operation. Protect active utility pipes and electrical systems encountered, as well as notify persons owning same. 4. Protect neighboring property, occupants of said property, customers, visitors, passers- by from injury and discomfort caused by dust or debris. 5. Maintain street and site drains, catch basins, and sewers open for free drainage. 1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIAL A. Store and handle salvaged material with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to finishes and materials. B. Store salvaged material to prevent corrosion, deterioration, and damage. C. Bent, dented, scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged items are not acceptable for reinstallation and must be replaced by items and components in new condition. 1.8 OBJECTIONABLE NOISES A. Limit use of air hammers and all other noise producing equipment as much as possible. B. Conform to local governing noise restrictions and requirements. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Visit site prior to bidding to determine nature of existing site conditions, materials, and other conditions that may affect work. Drawings of previously existing facilities are available for information only and do not necessarily reflect the actual conditions. The Contractor shall verify locations of existing utilities prior to proceeding with any work. B. Carefully maintain all benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at the Contractor's expense. C. Underground utilities and elements: Locate all underground utilities and elements prior to digging and/or driving stakes. Take care, to neither disturb nor damage any existing above ground or underground utilities or elements noted to be protected. The Contractor shall call Utility Notification Center (811) or (800) 424-5555 or click www.callbeforeyoudig.org for utility location at or near the Public Rights -of -Way / Property Lines, and can also call Locating, Inc. (425) 392-6412, CNI (206) 255-8650 or Applied Professional Services (425) 313-1034 for location of utilities within the site, (note: these firms will charge for services rendered). The Contractor must pay for all fees and costs associated with utility disconnect, capping of lines, and meter removals required within the Public Rights -of -Way. SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET D. Do not disturb utilities within the Seattle Public Utilities (SPU) Right of Way. Known utilities include SPU water lines. If a conflict arises regarding the utilities, notify Owner (City of Renton), Owner's Representative, and the SPU Inspector (as applicable) immediately. E. Meet with Owner and the Owner's Representative on -site once Contractor has verified the location of utilities with the Contractor's location services. Utility Shutoffs: Coordinate all work with other Division 01 requirements. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Keep streets, sidewalks and site clean and free from debris at all times. Keep both street and site drainage systems open for free passage of runoff at all times. Provide siltation control and catch basin protection as required by Best Managements Practices and Drainage Codes as required and/or directed by the Owner's Representative. G. Submit written verification that all appropriate services have been disconnected. 1.10 PERMITS, CODES, & REGULATIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and shall comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations, which in anyway affect the conduct of the work. C. Comply with environmental agencies, building codes and other local requirements that are more stringent than included in Contract Specifications. 1.11 CONDUCT OF WORK A. Confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner for operations, including material and equipment storage. B. Progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the work proceeds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. As required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/oras specified in the Contract Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Review the topographical survey documents included in the Contract Drawings, the geotechnical report (for reference only) in Appendix B, the Archaeological Monitoring in Appendix I, and visit the site in order to make determination of the site improvements to be demolished and removed including above and below- grade demolitions. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET A. In areas shown in the Contract Drawings, clear and grub the vegetation and root layers, obstructions, and debris to a soil depth of 4 inches and disposed of off-site.This soil layer shall not be acceptable for reuse. 1. Do not remove trees or other vegetation indicated to remain. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of trees to remain. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with Lawn Soil and Sod Lawn per specification 32 90 00 — PLANTING and Earthwork specifications in Division 31 unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated in the Contract Drawings. C. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site and haul to an approved offsite disposal location. Do not burn or bury materials onsite. 3.3 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove grass before stripping topsoil, and dispose of grass and roots offsite at an approved location. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying non -organic subsoil. C. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials and remove from project site. D. Existing topsoil may be stockpiled for reuse as fill material. Refer to Specification 3290 00 for requirements for reuse of existing, native topsoil. 3.4 REMOVAL OF TREES A. Removal of trees includes digging out and grinding of stumps, digging out obstructions, and grubbing roots. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris to a minimum depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Notify Owner's Representative in writing for site review prior to filling depressions left by removal activity. B. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain in the Contract Drawings. C. Fill depressions caused by tree removal operations with Lawn Soil and Sod Lawn per specification 32 90 00 - PLANTING unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated in the Contract Drawings. 3.5 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVING, CONCRETE CURBS, AND ASPHALT PAVING A. Identify the areas as shown on Contract Drawings of existing concrete paving, concrete curbs, and asphalt paving that is designated to be removed. B. Provide a clean, sawn edge through the material to be removed to protect adjacent paving or curb to remain. Use care to protect paved edges to remain as the saw -cut edge will remain as the finished edge against new concrete work. C. Completely remove concrete paving, concrete curb, and asphaltpaving including base courses to the depth of the existing subgrade. Care must be taken not to undermine SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00-5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET adjacent paving to remain. 3.6 REMOVE IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT A. Identify areas as shown on Contract Drawings of existing irrigation system to be removed for approval of the Owner's Representative prior to commencing thiswork. B. After approval, remove lateral pipe, mainline, heads, control wires, and other irrigation items as shown on Contract Drawings. C. Use care to not damage equipment and piping to remain in place at connection points. D. Cap and abandon pipe that is to remain as shown on Contract Drawings. E. Salvage and return to Owner the Irrigation Controller (modules and cabinet). 3.7 REPAIR AND REPLACE A. Repair to minor damages to existing work that is to be protected will only be allowed as reviewed and approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Repair work must be provided in first quality, workmanlike condition and per manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove all damaged components as determined by the Owner's Representative. D. Irreparable damage to existing items of the park must be replaced in -kind ina workmanlike manner per original contract drawings for that work. E. Replacement work of and repair work to existing built work that was to be protected is at no cost to the Owner. 3.8 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND SITE ELEMENTS A. Remove existing above and below grade structures and site elements as indicated in Contract Drawings and as necessary to facilitate new construction improvements. 3.9 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES A. Trenches, holes, or pits that result from demolition activities shall be filled to existing grade with imported trench backfill per specification 31 23 23.15 —TRENCH BACKFILL or Soil per specification 32 90 00 — PLANTING, whichever applies per the depths shown in the Contract Drawings. All excavated material must be properly disposed of off -site. B. Remove utilities as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Terminate utilities in accordance with the requirements of the Utility Provider. Where pipe abandonment is noted in Contract Drawings, completely fill abandoned pipe with flowable cement slurry. C. Contractor shall arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. D. Coordinate and pay for any utility provider fees associated with disconnecting services. E. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place. SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON Provide coordination with all serving utility agencies. G. Protect existing utilities to remain. 3.10 REMOVAL OF ITEMS WITH BELOW GRADE FOUNDATIONS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Removal of items with buried foundations as noted in the Contract Drawings include the removal of the item, the foundation, and any gravel base material below the foundation. Backfill holes with imported backfill per specification 31 23 23 — FILLAND BACKFILL. 3.11 REMOVAL OF SURFACE MOUNTED ITEMS A. Removal of surface mounted items include the removal of all surface mounting hardware, metal chains, and locks. 3.12 CLEAN UP A. All work areas shall be kept clean during progress of work and until completion. Dispose of all surplus materials, waste materials, and rubbish off -site inaccordance with all governmental laws, regulations, and ordinances. B. Provide certification from disposal site operator stating the disposal site complies with all governmental regulations. The Contractor, in a manner consistent with all government regulations, shall dispose of the refuse resulting from demolition. In no case shall refuse material be left on the project site, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. All effort shall be made to recycle materials whenever possible. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any debris resulting from work of this Section C. No on -site burning will be permitted. END OF SECTION SITE DEMOLITION 0241 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls, including waterstops. 3. Ramp and walkway. 4. Slabs -on -grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Division 03 "Concrete Finishes" for finishing of floors and slabs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, other pozzolans, slag cement, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Cementitious Materials other than Portland cement. C. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Include either the "Field Experience Method Form" or the "Trial Batch Method Form", provided in this specification. Fill out the forms in their entirety. 2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 3. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Embedded Item Placement Drawings: Drawings indicating the location and type of plates, anchorages, sleeves or other items to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete members and surfaces. 1. Submit coordinated drawings combining embedded items from all trades. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Locate embedded items relative to edges of and openings within concrete members. E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form -release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint -filler strips. 11. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. D. Evaluation Reports: ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES report certifying product compliance with IBC 2021 for each of the following: 1. Adhesives for post -installed dowels. 2. Post -installed anchors. E. Curing Procedures: Written procedures indicating proposed methods for curing concrete and that address the following: 1. Timing and rate of application of Evaporation Retarder, Curing Compound , and Curing and Sealing Compound. 2. Timing of installation of Moisture -Retaining Cover and Absorptive Cover. 3. Duration of and methods for providing moist cure of Formed and Unformed Surfaces. 4. Adjustments to curing procedures in the event of cold weather or hot weather as defined by ACI 306.1 and ACI 305.1, respectively. F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements: indicating compliance with specified tolerances. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Keep reinforcement off ground by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average of highest and lowest ambient temperature from midnight to midnight is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305.1 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 1.9 REDESIGN A. Redesign or Departures from Requirements of the Contract Documents Initiated by Contractor: 1. Obtain written acceptance from the Architect and Architect's consultants. 2. Bear costs for Contractor -initiated or construction error -caused changes to type, form, system, or details of construction from those indicated by the Contract Documents. 3. Pay fees required by Architect and Architect's consultants for review of such changes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 3. ACI 318. 2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET a. High -density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. C. Structural 1, B-B or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. 3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. F. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to CRSI RB4.1-2016, "Supports Used for Reinforcement in Concrete". Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI RB4.1-2016 of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/11. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET b. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS (portland blast -furnace slag), Type IP (portland-pozzolan), Type IL (portland-limestone), Type IT (ternary blended) cement. C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: Unless maximum coarse aggregate size is otherwise specified, the maximum aggregate size shall not exceed: a. Three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, prestressed reinforcement, individual tendons, bundled tendons or ducts. b. One -fifth of the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms. C. One-third of the depth of the slabs or toppings D. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II. F. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable. 1. Do not use undocumented nonpotable water for concrete mixes. 2. Recycled water may be used in conformance with ASTM C 94, including optional chemical limits 3. Wash water may be used in conformance with ASTM C1602. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET the following: a. Williams Products, Inc.; www.wiIliamsproducts.net. 2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered. B. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. C. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240. 2.8 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 2. Concrete mix designs shall comply with the requirements of the structural drawings. B. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to the maximum allowed in ACI 318 with the Exposure Class listed on the Contract Documents. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice". 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Batch Tickets: Include the amount of water in the batch from the plant and the remaining K�K�P►[ :I IIIIIII)IT91Kill LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET water that may be added at the site, if any. B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.. C. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods and embedded structural steel items, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3.3 REMOVING FORMS A. Formwork that does not support weight of concrete in place, such as for walls and similar parts of the Work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and CRSI RB4.1 "Standard for Supports for Reinforcement Used In Concrete" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Defective Work: The following reinforcing steel work will be considered defective and shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner: 1. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings. 2. Bars damaged due to bending or straightening. 3. Bars heated for bending. F. Reinforcement not placed in accordance with the drawings. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Coat one- half of dowel length with form -release agent to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint where indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, only to the amount listed on the batch ticket, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to K�K�P►[ :I IIIIIII)IT91Kill ff: LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON mixture. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull - floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Apply scratch finish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Apply float finish to surfaces [indicated] [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo] <Insert locations>. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film -finish coating system] <Insert locations>. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs -on - grade. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]. E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method]. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in - place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot ;101T piii8101111 ;�i I I :I I It LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET temperatures in accordance with submitted Curing Procedures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 1. Evaporation Retarder may be omitted if the Curing Procedures demonstrate that moisture loss will not exceed 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Such determination must be based upon concrete mix characteristics and ambient environmental conditions at time of placement. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.11 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 11 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 12 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. 7. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Perform structural repairs of the following cracks using epoxy resin adhesive by injection as directed by the Architect. 1. Cracks in excess of 0.01 inch which extend through the full depth of a slab or wall. 2. Cracks in excess of 0.015 inch which do not extend through the full depth of a slab or wall. 3. Cracks which are subject to allowing water leakage though the crack. A. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: As indicated on the structural drawings. C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. D. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. F. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. G. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 13 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL - FIELD EXPERIENCE METHOD Project General Contractor Ready Mix Supplier Plant Supplying Con - MIX CONSTITUENTS Mix Design No Concrete Class Proposed Use Description Specific Gravity Weight (lb) or Dosage (oz) Absolute Volume (cubic foot) Cement Fly Ash Silica Fume Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate Water Admixtures Water Reducer Air Entrainer High Range Water Reducer Other Total MIX CHARACTERISTICS Water / Cementitious Ratio Air (%) Density (pcf) Slump (in) Before High Range Water Reducer After High Range Water Reducer CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 14 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL - FIELD EXPERIENCE METHOD (CONTINUED) REQUIRED BACK -UP DATA NOTE: THE SUBMITTED DATA SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: Yes No • Ten test reports (minimum) provided. • The reports encompass a period of not less than 60 days. • The reports are no more than 24 months old. • The reports are for concrete supplied from the same plant that will be sup- plying this project. • Submitted test data is supported by reports from an independent testing agency, and the independent agency's reports are available at the Engi- neer's request. REQUIRED STATISTICAL ANALYSIS METHOD FOR DETERMINING REQUIRED AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PICK ONE) ACI 301 Section 4.2.3.3.a — Standard Deviation 15 tests minimum required Specified compressive strength (psi) Calculated standard deviation of submitted data, ss (psi) Factor from Table 4.2.3.3.a.1, k Required average compressive strength from Table 4.2.3.3.a, f'cr (psi) Calculated average strength of submitted data (psi) ACI 301 Section 4.2.3.3.b — Standard Deviation Not Required Specified compressive strength (psi) Required Average Strength from Table 4.2.3.3.b, f'cr (psi) Calculated average strength of submitted data (psi) REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS (Please Check) Field Test Data Statistical Analysis Certification that all ingredients are compatible. Coarse Aggregate Gradation Fine Aggregate Gradation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 15 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL - TRIAL BATCH METHOD Project General Contractor Ready Mix Supplier Plant Supplying Concrete MIX CONSTITUENTS Mix Design No Concrete Class Proposed Use Description Specific Gravity Weight (lb) or Dosage (oz) Absolute Volume (cubic foot Cement Fly Ash Silica Fume Coarse Aggre- gate Fine Aggregate Water Admixtures Water Reducer Air Entrainer High Range Water Reducer Other Total MIX CHARACTERISTICS Water/Cementitious Ratio Air (%) Density (pcf) Slump (in) Before High Range Water Reducer After High Range Water Reducer CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 16 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL - TRIAL BATCH METHOD (CONTINUED) DOCUMENTATION OF AVERAGE STRENGTH NOTE: THE SUBMITTED DATA SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: Yes • At least three trial mixtures are included • At least three different cement contents are included. • At least three different water / cementitious materials ratios are included. • The trial batches are no more than 24 months old. REQUIRED STATISTICAL ANALYSIS No METHOD FOR DETERMINING REQUIRED AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PICK ONE) ACI 301 Section 4.2.3.3.a — Standard Deviation 15 tests minimum required from the plant supplying the concrete Specified compressive strength (psi) Calculated standard deviation of submitted data, ss (psi) Factor from Table 4.2.3.3.a.1, k Required average compressive strength from Table 4.2.3.3.a, f'cr (psi) Average strength of proposed mix, obtained from plot of submitted trial batch date (psi) ACI 301 Section 4.2.3.3.b — Standard Deviation Not Required Specified compressive strength (psi) Required Average Strength from Table 4.2.3.3.b, f'cr (psi) Average strength of proposed mix, obtained from plot of submitted trial batch date (psi) REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS (Please Check) Plot of compressive strength versus water / cementitious materials ratio If standard deviation is calculated: Field test data Statistical Analysis Certification that all ingredients are compatible. Coarse aggregate gradation Fine aggregate gradation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 17 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 03 35 43 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide polished concrete finishing as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Additional Attendees: a. Cast -in -place concrete subcontractor. 3. Additional Agenda Items: a. Concrete curing and finishing. b. Concrete flatness tolerance. C. Protecting concrete slabs between pouring and polishing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Liquid floor treatments. 2. Repair materials. B. Shop Drawings: Plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations. Include locations of construction joints and cold joints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality Control Submittals: Field test and inspection reports. B. Manufacturer Reports: Field instruction reports. C. Qualification Statements: Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Recommendations for cleaning and maintaining polished concrete finishes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Contractor crew, polishing equipment and liquid floor treatment manufacturers recently certified. POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Mockups: Construct 8 X 8 feet minimum size, or provide at Restroom. Demonstrate product interfaces, intersections, and terminations. 1. Mockup Locations: Coordinate with Architect. 2. Approved mockups establish work results standard. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR TREATMENTS - GENERAL A. Source Control: Provide floor treatments from one manufacturer. 2.2 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment, PC-1: Waterborne silicate or siliconate penetrating hardener. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Curecrete Retro Plate 99. b. Euclid Chemical Company Ultrasil Li. C. Green Umbrella, Dryshield. d. Laticrete L & M FGS Hardener Plus. e. PROSOCO, Inc. Consolideck LS. f. Solomon Colors Lythic Densifier. B. Accessory Materials: Penetrating floor treatment manufacturer recommended joint fillers, sealers, and cleaning solutions. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Tested per ANSI/NFSI B101.3 or ANSI A137.1 DCOF AcuTest. 1. Level Floor Surfaces: 0.42 minimum. 2. Stair Treads: 0.60 minimum. 3. Ramp Surfaces: 0.80 minimum. B. Physical Characteristics: Provide plant -mixed concrete per Section 03 30 00 and the following: 1. Coordinate mix of concrete with installer and manufacturer of polished concrete finishing systems to produce performance and aesthetic criteria indicated. C. Surface Finish: Average Roughness (Ra) measured by surface profilometer, per ASME B46.1 or CSDA-ST-115: Ra 16 pinch, plus or minus 2 pinch. D. Haze Index: ASTM D4039, 10 maximum, measured prior to installation of gloss -enhancing surface treatment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Concrete Slabs: Verify substrates are acceptable for polishing. 1. Verify concrete is fully cured and meets flatness specified in Section 03 30 00. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to concrete finishing material POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET performance. B. Fill surface imperfections using manufacturer recommended materials. Grind smooth and level. C. Protect adjacent areas from overspray. 3.3 POLISHING A. Final Polishing Work Results: 1. Matte: 400 grit; smooth, low -sheen surface. a. Applications: Restroom and Stage area, as indicated in Drawings. 2. Distinctness of Image, DOI: ASTM D5767, Level 2. 3. Aggregate Appearance: Architect selected or Match approved mockup. B. Floor Polishing: 1. Machine grind floor level and smooth and to depth required to reveal aggregate matching approved field sample. 2. Apply liquid floor treatments. Allow recommend drying time between coats. 3. Polish floor with progressively finer grit diamond pads; achieve specified gloss level. 4. Neutralize, seal, and clean polished floor surfaces. C. Remove defects and repolish defective areas. D. Finish edges of floor finish adjoining other materials in clean and sharp manner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Engage inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to Work areas. 1. Failed Test Retest Cost: Contractor responsibility. B. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: ANSI/NFSI B101.3 orANSI A137.1 DCOF AcuTest. 1. Test Location: Restroom. 2. Test Quantity: One. C. Finish Quality: ASTM D5767 for image clarity and ASTM D4039 for haze. 1. Test Location: Architect directed. D. Non -Conforming Work: Re -polish and retest. 3.5 CLEANING A. Mechanically scrub treated floors with soft to medium pads and manufacturer approved cleaning solution. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect polished concrete floor from damage during subsequent construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures. END OF SECTION POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide metal fabrications as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project Site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Layouts, details, connections, anchorages. 1. Miscellaneous steel supports and framing. 2. Slotted channel framing assemblies. 3. Alternating tread devices. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Research Evaluation Reports: Post -installed anchor ICC-ES reports. B. Qualification Statements: Welders. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: 1. Steel Fabrications: AWS D1.1. 2. Aluminum Fabrications: AWS D1.2. 3. Stainless Steel Fabrications: AWS D1.6. B. Mockups and Field Samples: Metal fabrications for mockup and field samples assemblies where indicated in other Sections. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Structural Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992. B. Steel Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON C. Other Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A36. D. Steel Plates: ASTM A36 or A572, Grade 50. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET F. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Grade 33 Structural Quality, G60 galvanizing. G. Steel Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A or B and ASTM F3125, Type 1, Grade A325, heavy hex style. 1. Finish: Unfinished at interior locations, Hot -dip galvanized, or Mechanically galvanized at exterior locations. H. Steel Nuts: ASTM A563, types appropriate for bolts. 1. Finish: Unfinished at interior locations, Hot -dip galvanized, or Mechanically galvanized at exterior locations. I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, types as required for materials being welded. J. Galvanizing: G60; for all steel members and materials. K. Exposed Weathering Steel: Steel sheet metal intended to be exposed to view, without coatings or finishes, and of a chemical composition that anticipates natural, aesthetically pleasing corrosion without adverse effect on structural integrity. Common terms used to describe weathering steel are "Cor-Ten steel" or "corten steel". 1. Grades: a. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Original standard designation ASTM A242 (COR- TEN A) and/ or newer ASTM A588 (COR-TEN B). b. Steel Sheets: ASTM A606. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion or chemical anchors. 1. Material: Steel at interior locations and stainless steel at exterior locations. B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide or primer specified in Section 09 90 00 where required for compatibility with finish coating. C. Zinc Rich Primer: SSPC Paint 20, Type I Inorganic or Type II Organic. D. Separation Coating: Bituminous paint; SSPC-Paint 12. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to uniform small radius. E. Exposed Welded Joints: NOMMA Guideline 1 Joint Finish 3. F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET H. Tolerances: 1. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. 2. Face Offset: 1/16 inch, maximum. 3. Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch, maximum. 4. Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches, maximum. 5. Plane: 1/8 inch deviation in 48 inches, maximum. 2.4 FABRICATION - EXTERIOR CANOPIES A. Members: Structural steel sections shown on Drawings; weathering steel. B. Configuration: As indicated in Drawings. C. Coordination: Coordinate with 07 41 13.16 Section "Standing Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panels". 2.5 FABRICATION - PLANTING AREA EDGING A. Materials: Exposed weathering steel, shown on Drawings; weathering steel. B. Configuration: As indicated in Drawings. C. Finish: Provide manufacturer's recommended process to start patina for exposed weathering steel. 2.6 FABRICATION - MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS A. Timber Connectors: Structural steel sections shown on Drawings and to support applied loads; hot -dip galvanized and powder coated; refer to Finishes articles in this Section. B. Screen Supports and Other Equipment and Miscellaneous Supports: Structural steel sections to support applied loads; hot -dip galvanized; refer to Finishes articles in this Section. 1. Finish at Screen Supports: Where exposed to view, provide powder coated finish; black color. 2.7 FABRICATION - MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Miscellaneous Medical Equipment Supports: Delegate design to Professional Engineer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Halfen. b. Hilti USA. C. Unistrut Corporation. d. Or approved equal. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. 3. Framing Assemblies: Support equipment at ceiling plane, braced to prevent equipment movement during use. 4. Safety Factor: 3 times equipment weight, minimum. 5. Deflection Limit: 1/720 span in each direction, maximum. 6. Seismic Bracing: Design criteria stated on Structural Drawings. B. Finish: Factory painted or manufacturer's finish. 1. Color: Architect selected. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 2.8 STEEL FINISHES SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Prepare surfaces to be primed per SSPC SP 2. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter before finishing. C. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. D. Prime paint items in fabrication shop with one coat following striping of all corners, ends, transitions, welds, etc., except where galvanizing is specified. E. Galvanizing: ASTM A123; hot -dip galvanize after fabrication. F. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A153. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. G. Powder -Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's FEVE fluoropolymer resin -based, multi -coat powder coat finish to a dry film thickness in compliance with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Provide shop -applied powder -coat finish meeting AAMA 2605, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 2. Resin: Fluoroethylene-vinyl ether (FEVE) fluoropolymer. a. Basis -of -Design Resin: Lumiflon by AGC Chemicals Americas; www.lumiflonusa.com. 3. Basis -of -Design Powder Coat Product: IFS 500FP by IFS Coatings; www.ifscoatings.com. a. Applicator: Shall be coating manufacturer registered. 4. Colors: a. Materials Adjacent to or Attached to Materials Indicated to have Weathering Steel Finish: Custom color to match weathering steel finish as selected and approved by Architect. b. All Other Components: Custom color to match RAL-standard color as selected by Architect. 5. Applications: Mass timber connectors and other components indicated to receive powder - coat finish. H. Weathering Steel/ Prepatinated Finish: Preweather to match standing seam metal wall and roof panels, using process similar to that manufacturer, applied in a consistent and continuous fashion to create a uniform weathered appearance. Avoid streakiness, blotchiness or other distinct imperfections. Match approved sample. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip metal fabrications and primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates for items required to be cast into concrete. C. Apply separation coating to aluminum surfaces contacting dissimilar metals, concrete, and masonry. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Separate dissimilar exterior metals with non -absorptive gaskets. C. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. D. Fasten Work rigidly and securely to supports. E. Field weld components shown on Drawings or shown on Shop Drawings per AWS D1.1. F. Obtain Architect approval before site cutting or making unanticipated adjustments. G. After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint or zinc -rich paint to match shop finishes. H. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Attach supports rigidly and securely to building structural elements. 2. Brace overhead support framing to prevent movement of supported items. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Plumb: 1/4 inch deviation maximum, either per story or every 12 ft in height, whichever is greater; non -cumulative. B. Alignment: 1/8 inch offset deviation, maximum. C. Position: 1/4 inch deviation, maximum. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Clean and touch up damaged primer paint with same product applied in shop. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide pipe and tube railings as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project Site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Railing system components. 2. Handrail brackets. 3. Shop primer. 4. Prefinished Components: Initial selection color charts or Samples. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Railing layout, profiles and sizes, and anchorage details. 2. Railing connections. 3. Anchorage accessories and fasteners. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For components indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For Professional Engineer. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. W Iding qualifications. 2. Mill certificates, for Type 316 stainless steel. B. Delegated Design Submittals: Sealed calculations and Shop Drawings. 1. Guards and infill. 2. Handrails. C. Test and Evaluation Reports: Manufacturer test results showing: 1. Code compliance of post -installed anchors. D. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Fabricator of railings. 2. Welding: Welders qualified as follows. a. Steel Members: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. b. Aluminum: AWS D1.2/D1.2M. C. Steel Sheet: AWS D1.3/D1.3M. 3. Licensed Professionals: Engineer experienced in designing railings, licensed in jurisdiction in which the Project is located. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabricating. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL RAILINGS A. Steel Railings: 1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/4 inch diametertubing or pipe. 2. Guard Infill: Standing seam system of perforated corten steel attached to frame of railing system as indicated in Drawings; coordinate with Section 07 41 13.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panels. 3. Splice Connectors: Hot -dip galvanized steel or Steel, concealed spigots, welding collars, or threaded collars. 4. Exposed Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel or Stainless steel, flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with railing design. 5. Anchors: Hot -dip galvanized steel, Stainless steel, or Steel; selected to meet structural performance requirements and substrate conditions. 6. Application: Ramp. B. Handrails: 1. Metal Handrail: 1-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel tube. 2. Finish: Directional polish, no. 4. 3. Lighting: Provide integral LED strip lighting within recess at underside of handrail as indicated in Drawings. C. Wall Brackets: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. As selected by Architect. 2. Wall Mounted Brackets: Concealed fastener design. a. Material and Finish: Same as railing. b. Clearance: 1-1/2 inch gap between handrail and wall surface. D. Materials: 1. Tubing: ASTM A513. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Pipe: a. ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40. b. ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, grade and weight determined by structural requirements. 3. Bars, Plates, and Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. E. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23/A123M; hot -dip after fabrication. 2.2 PERFORMANCE A. Delegate railing design to manufacturer licensed Structural Engineer. B. Handrail Structural Design: 1. Live Loads: 50 plf uniform, 300 Ibf concentrated, non -simultaneous. C. Guard Structural Design: 1. Guard Infill: 50 psf uniform and 200 Ibf concentrated, both horizontal and non - simultaneous. D. Structural Design Criteria: See Structural Drawings. E. Allowable Deflection: 1/360 of unsupported length or height, maximum. F. Accessibility Requirements: Applicable provisions in Department of Justice publication 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, ICC/ANSI A117.1, or state accessibility code. G. Handrail Continuity: Gripping surfaces uninterrupted by newel posts, structural elements, or obstructions. H. Guard Infill Design: Openings preventing 4 inch diameter sphere passage. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Selected per AWS for metal being welded and structural requirements. B. Bituminous Paint: ASTM D1187 asphalt emulsion. C. Grout: ASTM C1107, factory -packaged nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant exterior use grout. D. Embedded Sleeves: Stainless or Galvanized steel tubes; sized to fit posts, 6 inches long, minimum, with closed bottom. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory Assembly: Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Furnish spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. C. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as railing assembly. E. Railing Joints and Connections: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations not encouraging water intrusion. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler or continuous welds. 3. Exposed Welded Joints: NOMMA Guideline 1 Joint Finish # 3. F. Accurately form components to suit stairs, ramps and landings, to each other, and to building structure. G. Accommodate expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to member connections. H. Railing Ends: Closed, except when railing returns to within 1/8 inch of wall face. I. Changes in Direction: 1. Uniform, without buckling, twisting, deforming or cracking surfaces. 2. Formed by flush bending or with prefabricated elbow fittings. 3. Radii: See Drawings. 2.5 STEELAND IRON FINISHES A. Powder -Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's FEVE fluoropolymer resin -based, multi -coat powder coat finish to a dry film thickness in compliance with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Provide shop -applied powder -coat finish meeting AAMA 2605, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 2. Resin: Fluoroethylene-vinyl ether (FEVE) fluoropolymer. a. Basis -of -Design Resin: Lumiflon by AGC Chemicals Americas; www.lumiflonusa.com. 3. Basis -of -Design Powder Coat Product: IFS 500FP by IFS Coatings; www.ifscoatings.com. a. Applicator: Shall be coating manufacturer registered. 4. Colors: a. terials Adjacent to or Attached to Materials Indicated to have Weathering Steel Finish: Custom color to match weathering steel finish as selected and approved by Architect. b. All Other Components: Custom color to match RAL-standard color as selected by Architect. 5. Applications: Mass timber connectors and other components indicated to receive powder - coat finish. B. Weathering Steel/ Prepatinated Finish: Preweather to match standing seam metal wall and roof panels, using process similar to that manufacturer, applied in a consistent and continuous fashion to create a uniform weathered appearance. Avoid streakiness, blotchiness or other distinct imperfections. Match approved sample. 2.6 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 3 EXECUTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify concealed blocking and reinforcement is installed and correctly located to receive wall mounted handrails. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates for items required to be cast into concrete. C. Apply separation coating to aluminum surfaces contacting dissimilar metals, concrete, and masonry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortions or defects. B. Anchor Posts to Structure: 1. Posts: Preset sleeves in concrete; set posts in sleeves and fill space around posts with grout. 2. Posts: Core drill concrete; set posts in cored holes and fill space around posts with grout. C. Attach Railings: 1. II Mounting: Mount with wall brackets and end flanges. 2. ardrail Mounting: Weld or Fasten railing brackets to posts. D. Field weld anchors as shown on Drawings. Grind welds smooth. Touch up welds with primer. E. Assemble with spigots and sleeves to accommodate tight joints and secure installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Engage inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to Work areas. 1. Failed Test Retest Cost: Contractor responsibility. 2. Do not begin construction until inspectors have verified compliance of materials. 3. Do not use materials that fail tests and inspections. B. Testing: ASTM E894 and ASTM E935 on randomly selected representative railing assemblies. C. Non -Conforming Work: Remove and replace, and retest. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean stainless steel with soap and clean water. B. Primed Steel: Remove substances that may impair finish paint bond. 3.6 REPAIR A. Apply primer to field welds, bolted connections, and damaged areas of factory applied primer. B. Apply galvanizing repair paint per ASTM A780 to field welds, bolted connections, and damaged areas of hot -dip galvanized members. C. Remove scratches and abrasions from stainless steel surfaces by polishing to match factory finish. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect railings during construction period against soiling and damage. END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552 13 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: Provide rough carpentry as indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. W od-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 3. Power -driven fasteners. 4. Post -installed anchors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 W PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the American ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Lumber Standard Comm ttee (ALSC) Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame - spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire - retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire -retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: 1. Treat all rough carpentry indicated on Drawings, and the following: a. Concealed blocking. b. Roof construction. C. Plywood backing panels. 2. Exception: For projects utilizing framing cavity insulation, where Code allows, do not provide fire retardant treatment. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber 19 percent maximum moisture content; of the following species and grades: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. 4. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. For projects utilizing exposed mass timber structural members, utilize only Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire -retardant -treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Provide blocking as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. F. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener and one of the following, or as indicated in Drawings: Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3, "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3, "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings. H. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal -size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal -size furring vertically at 16 inches O.C. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide sheathing as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store sheathing elevated above grade, protected from precipitation and stormwater runoff. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALLAND ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA rated Exposure 1. 1. Span Rating: 24/0 or See Drawings. 2. Thickness: See Drawings. 3. Application: Behind flat metal panels above proscenium beam. B. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation GlasRoc. b. National Gypsum Gold Bond eXP. C. USG Corporation Securock. d. Or approved equal. 2. Thickness: 1/2 in. minimum; 5/8 in. where indicated. 3. Applications: a. W II sheathing as indicated. b. Protection layer at roof deck as indicated. SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2.2 W TREATMENTS A. Fire Retardant Treated Wood Backer Boards: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics perASTM E84. a. Flame Spread: 25. b. Smoke Developed: 450. 2. Labeling: Testing agency classification. B. Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1 pressure process. 1. Indoor: Category UC2. 2. Exterior: Category UC3b. 3. Ground Contact: Category UC4a. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners, General: ASTM A153 galvanized steel. B. Screws: 1. Fastening Sheathing to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954. a. Include wafer heads and reamer wings. 2. Fastening Sheathing to Steel Studs Under 33 Mils: ASTM C1002. C. Adhesives: Approved for use by sheathing and adhesive manufacturers, perAPAAFG 01 or ASTM D3498. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install sound, undamaged materials. B. Fastener Spacing: Leave expansion space at panel joints and adjacent assemblies as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION - W SHEATHING A. Wall And Roof Sheathing: 1. Nail and Fasten panels to wood framing. a. Apply glue to framing before fastening sheathing. 2. Screw panels to metal framing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum sheathing per GA-253 and ASTM C1280. B. Screw gypsum sheathing to wood framing. C. Install fasteners to bear against panel face. Do not install fasteners through panel face. SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.4 PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Do not leave panels exposed to moisture. Replace wet panels or allow to dry completely before installing sealants, tape, weather barrier and siding and roofing panels. END OF SECTION SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 06 17 19 - CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide cross -laminated timber as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AOR: Architect of Record. B. CLT: A prefabricated engineered wood product made of at least three orthogonal layers of graded sawn lumber or structural composite lumber (SCL) that are laminated by gluing with structural adhesives. C. CLT Manufacturing: The process of assembling longitudinal and transverse layers of lumber with structural adhesives to form rectangular panels of specified length, width, and thickness, for use as roof or wall panels. D. CLT Fabrication: The cutting and tooling of manufactured CLT panels to exact dimensions and detailing required for final assembly in the project. E. NLGA: The National Lumber Grades Authority (Canada). F. SEOR: Structural Engineer of Record for the project. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/APA PRG 320 - Standard for Performance -Rated Cross -Laminated Timber; current version. B. ANSI 405 - Standard for Adhesives for Use in Structural Laminated Timber; current version. C. ASTM D7612 - Standard Practice for Categorizing Wood and Wood -Based Products According to Their Fiber Sources; 2010(2015). D. CLT Certification Agencies: 1. TECO - PFS Corporation d/b/a PFS TECO; www.pfsteco.com. 2. Intertek; www.intertek.com. E. DIN EN 301 — Adhesives, phenolic and Aminoplastic, for Load -Bearing Timber Structures — Classification and Performance Requirements. F. DIN EN 302 — Adhesives for Load -Bearing Timber Structures — Test Methods. G. DIN 68141 — Wood Adhesives — Determination of the Open Drying Time and Evaluation of Wetting and Brushability. H. National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction; current version. I. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) — NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. J. PEFC - Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification; www.pefc.co.uk. CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. APA Product Certificate per APA PRG 320. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For CLT panels indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Shop Drawings: Supplier to provide 2D shop drawings that track the increased Level of Detail (LOD) throughout the submittal process in the following order: a. LOD300 Slab Plans and Connections: Provide floor plans and elevations clearly showing the extents of all mass timber slabs in relation to gridlines, relevant structural trades and finish conditions found in the Contract Documents. Indicate how slab edge locations are to comply with erection and fabrication tolerances with relevant trades as stated in their respective spec sections. Indicate areas of confusion not clearly shown in Contract Documents, provide detail drawings indicating all unique bearing conditions, fastener spacing and requested tolerances for installation. b. LOD350 Panel Layout and MEPF Sleeves: Provide floor plans and elevations indicating panel layout and all coordinated penetrations and routing for utilities, defined notches, and any dapped components. Clearly dimension all sleeves, diameter and location from adjacent panel edges. Clearly dimension panel layout and propose panel numbering to be utilized for installation. State information listed in subparagraph c, LOD400, for unique groups of panel conditions. The acceptance of this submittal will serve as Approval for Fabrication. C. LOD400 Single Piece Shop Drawings for Record: Documentation of each unique panel clearly stating the following information: 1) Stress Grade, Service Grade, Finish Grade. 2) Span direction. 3) Lifting connection points. 4) Panel thickness and layup. 5) Edge conditions. 6) Overall and penetration dimensions. 7) North Arrow. 8) Panel production number. D. Method Statements: Rigging Plan: Describe lifting and handling requirements for each different panel type, taking into consideration openings and cut-outs in panels. 2. Bracing Plan for CLT Walls: a. Submit installation method statement and bracing plan, stamped and signed by a by a Professional Engineer registered in the jurisdiction where project is located. The plan shall include an evaluation of temporary loading conditions and bracing of wall panels to structure during installation. Describe difference in bracing when wall panels serve as structural diaphragm and when they do not. b. Indicate support and connection type of bracing to wall panels. CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET C. Where concealed connections are not possible, include proposed repair procedures for bracing and other temporary connections. E. Weather and Moisture Protection Plan: Submit proposed coverings and removal sequence, and standing water mitigation plan during construction, as applicable. F. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) samples of CLT panels, approximately 12 by 12 inches for each thickness required, with shop -applied finish coating. G. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's qualifications. 2. Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC) log. 3. Preinstallation conference minutes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Standard: Certify CLT panels to APA PRG 320. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Certification: Manufacturer shall be certified by the American Plywood Association - Engineered Wood Systems (APA EWS), PFS TECO, or Intertek. 2. Design Standards: Manufacturer shall comply with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction - NDS, applicable to types of CLT panels indicated. 3. Compliance with adhesive manufacturer's written recommendations. C. The fabricator shall keep a Quality Control (QC) log of items, including the following: 1. Environmental conditions at all stages, including fabrication and storage. 2. Actual length, thickness, and width of the panels. 3. Hardware and fastener installation sign -off. 4. Note of any changes or modifications. D. The erector shall keep a Quality Control (QC) log of items, including the following: 1. Environmental conditions at all stages, including storage, transportation, and erection. 2. Hardware and fastener installation sign -off. 3. Note of any changes or modifications. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers, fabricators and erectors involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow. 2. Notify Owner's representative, AOR, SEOR and testing agency of scheduled meeting dates. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect CLT panel during delivery, storage and handling. B. Support units during shipment on non -staining material in same position as during storage. C. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil and separated with stripping, so air may circulate around all faces of CLT panels. Take actions to prevent staining, cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible. 2. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design to avoid excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage. Protect corners with wood blocking. 3. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings. 4. Slit underside of membrane covering during storage at site to avoid accumulation of condensation or moisture. Take care to not deface underside surface of CLT panels. 5. If factory coverings have been removed, cover top and sides with opaque moisture resistant membrane. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Bracing and Temporary Shoring: Follow installation method statement and bracing plan, including evaluation of temporary loading conditions and bracing of structure during installation. B. Manufacturer shall have APA PRG 320 certification for all layups required by the Contract Documents. C. Manufacturer's panels shall meet or exceed the minimum design values as required in the Contract Documents. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Kalesnikoff. B. Mercer Mass Timber LLC. C. Approved equal. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Wood Species: 1. Provide minimum or better grades as specified in APA PRG 320; for laminated stock for Cross -Laminated Timber (CLT) panels. 2. Acceptable Species: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Adhesives: Provide adhesive products in compliance with ANSI 405 and ANSI/ APA PRG 320, to grade of service required in accordance with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS). 1. Lamination Edge Gluing: Not required. 2. Adhesive Color: White/ clear. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: As indicated in Structural Drawings. B. Wrapping Material: Weatherproof and lightproof material that will not adversely affect panels. C. Factory -Applied, Self -Adhered Weather Protection: Provide factory -applied protective layer at top side of CLT panels prior to loading for delivery. ASTM D1970, polyethylene film laminated to layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40-mil ( (1.0-mm)) total thickness; maximum permeance rating of 0.03 perm; cold applied, with slip -resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Basis -of -Design Product: VForce Vapor Barrier by Firestone Building Products Co.; www.firestonebpco.com. 2. Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. D. Seal Tape at Panel Joints and Ends: For protection of CLT panels from movement of water down through mass timber system and from moisture at concrete during topping slab placement and curing. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: 6-inch wide Stego-Crete Claw Tape by Stego Industries, LLC; www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Other Approved Manufacturers: a. Rotho Blaas SRL; www.rothoblass.com. b. Siga; www.siga.swiss. 2.5 MANUFACTURING A. Manufacture CLT panels in accordance with APA PRG 320. B. Manufacture panels in a temperature -controlled facility. Pre -heating lamination stock is not permitted. C. Standard Laminations: Use multiple layers of 5/8 inch (16 mm) minimum to 2 inches (51 mm) maximum thick laminations. D. Appearance Classifications: Provide CLT panels meeting Appendix A of APA PRG 320 and the following additional requirements: 1. Architectural Appearance Classification: Locations where CLT panels are exposed to view in final construction. a. Blue -stain/ beetle -kill lumber material is not permitted on visual surface. b. Knots: NLGA Grade Rule; Select Structural limitation, Select Tight Knot. C. Pitch Streaks: Pitch streaks are not permitted. d. Wane: Wane on face is not permitted. e. Side pressure on exposed faces is required. f. Sanding: Sand surfaces to remain exposed in final installation. 2. Industrial Appearance Classification: For locations where CLT panels are concealed from view. a. Staining: Heart and/or blue stain are allowed up to 5 percent of visual surface. b. Shake and checks: Allowed; shall not exceed 36 inches or 1/4 of the panel length. C. Knots: Knots shall be well -spaced, quantity not limited. d. Wane: Minimal wane on face is permitted. e. Side pressure on exposed face is not required. E. Tolerances: 1. Height: Plus or minus 5/64-inch (2 mm) or 2 percent of panel thickness, but not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Length: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 4. Squareness: The length of two panel face diagonals measured between panel corners shall not differ by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. Straightness: Deviation of edges from straight line between adjacent panel corners shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate panels with approved splice connection details, as indicated in Contact Documents. B. Joints: Route CLT panels along edges for continuous spline as indicated in shop drawings. C. Chamfers: Not permitted. D. Identification: Mark CLT panels for identification during erection. 1. Clearly mark top surface of panels with the following: a. Length, width, thickness and diagonal measurement. b. Tolerances as per these specifications. C. Provide stamp for plan North on the top of each panel along the North edge. d. No identification marks allowed on panel faces exposed to view in final construction. 2.7 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A36/ A36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot -rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1011/ A1011 M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate connections as detailed on Contract Documents. 2. Bolts: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A563/ A563M; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Connector Finishes: 1. Hot dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123/ A123M or ASTM A153/ A153M. 2.8 FINISHES A. Protective Sealer: 1. Apply protective coating to CLT panels within an enclosed, weather -protected finishing and storage space. 2. Protective Coating: Apply two coats of protective coating to all penetrations, holes, opening, and perimeter edges of panels. a. Basis -of -Design Product: SDF by Sansin Corp.; www.sansinfactoryfinish.com. 1) Tint Color: 25 percent. b. Other Approved Products: TBD. CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Field -Applied Final Finish, Exterior and Interior Applications: Coordinate with final field -applied finish stain and seal in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 1. Patch, finish and treat all exposed ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to site erection, examine site conditions and ensure acceptable conditions for erection. B. Examine locations to receive CLT for compliance with requirements, tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with installation method statement and bracing plan. B. Erect CLT panels in accordance with engineered rigging plans and in coordination with shop drawings. C. Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. Set CLT panels level and plumb to correct positions. Securely brace CLT panels and anchor in place to maintain plumb until permanently secured by finished structure. D. Fit CLT panels closely and accurately, without trimming, cutting or other modifications. 1. Site cutting or boring of CLT panels, other than shown on shop drawings is not permitted without written consent of SEOR and AOR. E. Join CLT panels along edges using a continuous spline as indicated in shop drawings. 1. Gap between adjacent CLT panels: 1/8-inch. 3.3 FIELD FINISHING A. Field Finishing: Stain and seal in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of CLT panels after erection and completion of field touch up. 1. Clean all exposed surfaces. 2. Perform cleaning procedures, as necessary, according to CLT manufacturer's written recommendations and as instructed by AOR. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 3. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed CLT panels or damage adjacent materials. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Protect installed panels from damage during construction. B. Prevent standing water on panel faces. C. Remove panel protection immediately prior to installation. END OF SECTION CROSS -LAMINATED TIMBER 06 17 19 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 06 18 11 - GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide glued -laminated timber framing as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions, General: According to APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA) and International Building Code (IBC). B. AOR: Architect of Record for Project. C. Glued -Laminated Timber Framing (Glulam): As defined by ASTM D3737, a glued -up material from selected and prepared pieces of wood either in a straight or curved form with the grain of pieces essentially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member, fabricated in a factory with potentially pre -installed hardware components. D. Fabrication: The cutting and tooling of manufactured glued -laminated timber framing to exact dimensions and detailing required for final assembly in Project. E. Manufacturing: The process of assembling layers of individual lumber pieces with structural adhesives to form glued -laminated timber framing components of specified length, width, and thickness, for use as structural framing. F. SEOR: Structural Engineer of Record for the project. 1.3 REFERENCES A. General: For standards cited in this Section, refer to latest edition or version of standard appropriate to local Code requirements. B. Recommended Performance Guidelines: WoodWorks: U.S. Mass Timber Construction Manual. C. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 1. AITC 111-2005 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI 117-2020 - Standard Specification for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species. 2. ANSI A190.1-2022 - Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber. 3. ANSI 405-2018 - Standard for Adhesives for Use in Structural Laminated Timber. 4. ANSI/ AWC NDS-2018 - National Design Specification Standards (NDS) for Wood Construction. E. APA R540-2019 - Builder Tips: Proper Storage and Handling of Glulam Beams. F. ASCE/ SEI 7-2022 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Building and Other Structures. G. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1. AWPA U1-21 — Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. H. ASTM D7612 - Standard Practice for Categorizing Wood and Wood -Based Products According GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET to Their Fiber Sources; 2010 (2015). I. DIN EN 301 - Adhesives, phenolic and Amnoplastic, for Load -Bearing Timber Structures - Classification and Performance Requirements. J. DIN EN 302 - Adhesives for Load -Bearing Timber Structures - Test Methods. K. DIN 68141 - Wood Adhesives - Determination of the Open Drying Time and Evaluation of Wetting and Brushability. L. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) — NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. M. PEFC - Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification; www.pefc.co.uk. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For connectors. Include installation instructions. 3. For factory -applied sealing product. 4. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency documenting that Project's glued -laminated timber framing complies with requirements in A190.1 or EN 14080:2013. 5. Third Party product evaluation report from approved agency. Approved agencies include: AITC, APA, ICC-ES, Intertek, and PFS-TECO. 6. For preservative -treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 7. For connectors, include connector type, material, finish and installation instructions. For connector used with preservative treated products, include manufacturer's requirements for type and finish of connectors. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: Refer to Quality Assurance articles for qualification requirements. 1. Manufacturer's qualifications. 2. Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC) logs from manufacturing and fabrication. 3. Preinstallation conference minutes. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Supplier shall provide two-dimensional (2D) shop drawings that track the increased Level of Detail (LOD) throughout the submittal process in the following order: a. LOD350 Glued -Laminated Timber Framing and Connection Drawings: 1) Provide roof plans that identify the extent of all glued -laminated timber roof framing members in relation to building gridlines, relevant structural trades and finish conditions found in Contract. 2) Indicate interfaces with related structural trades to be shown for reference purposes only such as concrete construction. a) Indicate how framing members end and edge locations comply with erection and fabrication tolerances with relevant trades as stated in their respective specification sections. Include dimensions of gaps at ends and edges of framing members to allow for expansion. 3) Indicate lamination combinations, camber and species GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 -2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 4) Include details that may not be shown in Contract Documents but are required for proper installation. Provide detail drawings indicating all unique bearing conditions, fastener spacing and requested tolerances for installation. 5) Identify fire -resistance rated components, including notation on minimum required wood thicknesses to achieve fire rating, and accessory materials such as fire tape and fire sealants. 6) Clearly dimension framing member layout and propose framing member numbering to be utilized for installation. 7) Indicate which members will be exposed to view in final construction. 8) Include a unique framing member identification (ID) tag placed on each member. 9) Include a stamp indicating "TOP" of component and North facing surface. b. LOD350 Connection Details: 1) Provide floor plans shown in LOD300 submittal with callouts to unique connection conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents to be shown in enlarged details. 2) Enlarge details to indicate fabrication and installation tolerances in accordance with relevant Specification Sections. 3) Indicate size, type and grade of all fasteners. 4) Clearly show custom metal fabrications required for each connection condition as indicated in the Contract Documents including grade of steel, weld size and types, fasteners and spacings, and relevant notes to apply to unique instances not captured in the Contract Documents. 5) Acceptance of this submittal will serve as approval for fabrication for glued - laminated timber framing members as well as custom steel fabrications involved in the erection of glued -laminated timber framing. C. LOD400 Single Piece Shop Drawings: Documentation of each unique framing member clearly stating the following information: 1) Include unique part name for each panel which can be traced back to recorded fabrication data. 2) Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage to supporting structure. 3) Include and locate all openings. 4) Section shape and size. 5) Lamination combination. 6) Fire -resistance -rating, if applicable. 7) Camber and species. 8) Appearance Grade and edge condition. 9) Completed exposure condition. 10) Location and quantity of instance in Project. 11) Overall and unique dimensions. 12) Fabrication and/ or milling. 13) Connection information and fasteners required. GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 -3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 14) Finish requirements. 15) Plan North arrow. 16) Component production number. 2. The extent to which shop drawing submittals are combined or separated (i.e., by level or LOD) shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and the design team to assist in the development of detailing as it pertains to procurement, trade -partner coordination and overall construction schedule. To aid in this process, a direct line of communication shall be granted between supplier and design team. 3. Acceptance of shop drawing submittal will serve as approval for manufacture and fabrication. D. Material Certificates: For preservative -treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. E. Method Statements: 1. Rigging Plan: Describe lifting and handling requirements for each type of framing member, taking into consideration openings and cut-outs in component. 2. Temporary Bracing Plan for Glued -Laminated Timber Framing During Construction: a. Submit installation method statement and bracing plan. b. Plan shall include an evaluation of temporary loading conditions and bracing of glued -laminated timber framing to structure during installation. Describe difference in bracing when glued -laminated timber framing members serve as lateral bracing and when they do not. C. Indicate support and connection type of bracing to other components. d. Where concealed connections of temporary bracing are not possible, include proposed repair procedures for connection points after bracing and other temporary connections are removed. 3. Weather and Moisture Protection Plan: Submit proposed coverings and removal sequence and water mitigation plan during construction, as applicable. Include recommendations for repairing stained or otherwise damaged areas. F. Weather Protection Plan: Submit proposed coverings and removal sequence. G. Samples: Submit one (1) sample, with minimum dimension of 12 inches length by typical member width and depth, for each species and finish grade combination, demonstrating the range of variation to be expected in appearance of glued -laminated timber framing including variations due to specified treatment. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half-length of each sample. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Design Standards: Manufacturer shall comply with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS). 2. Compliance with adhesive manufacturer's written recommendations. B. The manufacturer shall keep a Quality Control (QC) log of items, including the following: Environmental conditions at all stages, including manufacturing, fabrication storage, transportation and erection. 2. Actual length, thickness, and width of the panels. GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Unique component ID placed on each member, which is trackable to manufacturing shop drawings and time of manufacturing. 4. Hardware and fastener installation sign -off. 5. Note of any changes or modifications. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow. 2. Notify Owner's representative, AOR, SEOR and testing agency of scheduled meeting dates. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111 and APA R540. B. Protect mass timber panels during delivery, storage and handling with water-resistant covering, in accordance with Weather Protection Plan. C. Support units during shipment on non -staining material in same position as during storage. D. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil and separated with stripping, so air may circulate around all faces of mass timber panels. Take actions to prevent staining, cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. 1. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible. 2. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design to avoid excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage. Protect corners with wood blocking. 3. Lift and support units only at designated points shown in shop drawings. 4. Slit underside of weather -resistant membrane covering during storage at site to avoid accumulation of condensation or moisture. Take care to not deface underside surface of mass timber panels. 5. If factory coverings have been removed, cover top and sides with opaque moisture - resistant membrane. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Glued -laminated timber framing and connectors shall meet or exceed minimum design values required in Contract Documents without exceeding allowable design working stresses, deflection and vibration requirements listed in ANSI 117 or determined according to ASTM D3737 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Moisture Content of Laminations at Time of Manufacture: Between 8 and 12 percent, plus or minus 3 percent. 2.2 FABRICATORS A. Fabricator: Same as for CLT panels. 2.3 GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING A. General: Provide glued -laminated timber framing that complies with ANSI A190.1 and ANSI 117 GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 -5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Factory mark each piece of glued -laminated timber framing in accordance with ANSI A190.1. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in the completed Work. 2. Provide glued -laminated timber framing made from solid lumber laminations, except with specific manufacturers' tested assemblies. 3. Provide glued -laminated timber framing made with wet -use adhesive complying with ANSI 405. B. Species and Grades for Glued -Laminated Timber Members: 1. Acceptable Species: As indicated on Structural Drawings. C. Adhesives: Provide adhesive products in compliance with ANSI 405, ANSI A190.1, DIN 68141 and EN301 and EN302 to grade of service required in accordance with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS). 1. Color: White/ clear; resorcinol -free adhesive (dark -colored adhesive not allowed). a. Exception: Non -white/ clear glue may be used pending sample review and approval by Architect. 2. Basis -of Design Product: Purbond HB E452 by Henkel Corp.; na.hen kel-adhesives.com. a. Certification: UL Greenguard Gold Certificate no. 9313-420. 3. Other Approved Manufacturer: Akzo Nobel; www.azkonobel.com. D. Appearance Grade Classification(s): Provide the following Appearance Grades as defined by ANSI A190.1. 1. Architectural: Provide where indicated in Contract Documents. 2.4 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A36/ A36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot -rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1011/ A1011 M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate connections as detailed on Contract Documents. 2. Bolts: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A563/ A563M; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Connector Finishes: 1. Hot dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123/ A123M or ASTM A153/ A153M. 2.5 SEALERS AND FINISHES A. Shop -Applied End Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended penetrating type, clear, non -yellowing liquid, compatible with specified finish coating. B. Protective Sealer: 1. Apply protective coating to CLT panels within an enclosed, weather -protected finishing and storage space. GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Protective Coating: Apply two coats of protective coating to all penetrations, holes, opening, and perimeter edges of panels. a. Basis -of -Design Product: SDF by Sansin Corp.; www.sansinfactoryfinish.com. 1) Tint Color: 25 percent. b. Other Approved Products: TBD. C. Field -Applied Final Finish, Exterior and Interior Applications: Coordinate with final field -applied finish stain and seal in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. B. Camber: When camber is required in the Contract Documents, fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to the amount specified through design. C. Where preservative -treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) prior to treatment to greatest extent possible. 1. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a shop -treatment preservative at cut, drilled, surfaced, or sanded locations to comply with AWPA M4. 2. Provide treatment indicated at Preservative Treatment articles in this Section. D. End -Cut Sealing: After end cutting each member to final length, and prior to installing any hardware, apply two saturation coats of end sealer to ends and other cross -cut surfaces. E. Seal Coat: Apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit after the manufacturing, planning, and sanding (if required per visual grade specification). F. Fabrication Tolerances: Comply with ANSI A190.1 for allowable tolerances for dimensions, camber or straightness, and squareness of cross section, unless otherwise agreed by AOR, SEOR, manufacturer, fabricator and erector. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop -Applied Sealers: 1. Apply end sealer to glued -laminated timber framing members within an enclosed, weather - protected finishing and storage space. 2. Apply two coats of end sealer to edges of penetrations, holes, openings, and perimeter edges of glued -laminated timber framing members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to site erection, examine site conditions and ensure acceptable conditions for erection. B. Examine locations to receive glued -laminated timber framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation refer to APA R540 for storage and protection. B. Bracing and Temporary Shoring: Follow installation method statement and bracing plan, including evaluation of temporary loading conditions and bracing of structure during installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with installation method statement and bracing plan. B. Erect glued -laminated timber framing in accordance with engineered rigging plans and in coordination with reviewed shop drawings. C. Follow Project's Weather and Moisture Protection Plan throughout construction period, until building is enclosed D. Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. Erect glued -laminated timber framing level and plumb to correct positions. Securely brace glued -laminated timber framing members and anchor in place to maintain plumb until permanently secured by finished structure. E. Handle and temporarily support glued -laminated timber framing components to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. F. Bracing Methods: 1. Class A: Friction fit attachment to columns. 2. Class B: Mechanical attachment to column, followed by hole repair putty matching wood color, and sand smooth. 3. Class C: Mechanical attachment to column without hole repair. G. Fitting: 1. Site cutting or boring of panels, other than shown in reviewed shop drawings is not permitted without written consent of SEOR and AOR. Where field -fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 2. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. H. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by AOR. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Structural Material Tolerances: 1. Gap between glued -laminated timber framing and structural steel components: 1/2-inch. 2. Gap between glued -laminated timber framing and concrete: 3/4-inch. 3. Allow extra bearing in adjacent materials and simplify connections for approved field trim of members to allow for coordination of industry standard tolerances at interface. 3.5 FIELD FINISHING A. Field Finishing: Stain and seal in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of glued -laminated timber framing after erection and completion of field touch up. 1. Clean all exposed surfaces. 2. Perform cleaning procedures, as necessary, according to glued -laminated timber framing manufacturer's written recommendations and as instructed by AOR. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. a. Repair water and rust stains. 3. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed mass timber panels or damage adjacent materials. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes following erection. Replace damaged glued -laminated timber framing components if repairs are not approved by AOR and SEOR. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed glued -laminated timber framing from damage during construction, including in accordance Weather Protection Plan. 1. Adhere to Contractor's Weather Protection Plan for retention of wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades, until Final Completion. 2. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a protection from adjacent painting or coating. 3. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside wrapping. END OF SECTION GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER FRAMING 06 18 11 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide finish carpentry as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials elevated above grade, protected from precipitation and stormwater runoff. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interior Ambient Limitations: 1. Interior Finish Carpentry: Building enclosed and environmental systems maintaining design conditions for Owner occupancy. B. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY A. Wood Cladding: Clear Finish Applications: Exterior face of hollow metal doors: 1. Species and Grade: Matching face lamela of CLT panels, as approved by Architect. 2. Face Surfaces: Smooth. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 4. Profile and Size: Tongue and groove; 1 X 6 nominal. 5. Finger Jointing: Not permitted. 6. Fabrication: Apply cladding to face of hollow metal doors as indicated using concealed fasteners to provide appearance matching exposed faces of CLT panels. 2.2 BASIC CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber for Opaque Finish: DOC PS 20; C Select grade; any species. 1. Cut: Plain sawn. 2. Finger Jointing: Permitted. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. Hardwood Lumber for Opaque Finish: Poplar or other close -grained species. 1. Cut: Plain sawn. 2. Finger Jointing: Permitted. C. Lumber Moisture Content Range: 8 to 13 percent. D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices as required to provide inconspicuous, secure attachment. B. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Adhesive: Wood glue or multipurpose construction adhesive for general carpentry use. 1. VOC Content: 70 g/L, maximum. D. Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color. E. Primer: 1. See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Ease edges to 1/16 in. radius. B. Kerf backs or back out standing and running trim except where ends are exposed in finished Work. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.5 FINISHES A. Primer Materials: See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Examine wood before installation and discard materials that are wet, damaged, warped, or that exhibit mold. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces of wood items and assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. B. Material Acclimation: AWI 200. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Installation and Tolerances: ANSI/AWI 0620, Custom Grade. B. Set and secure materials and components in place. C. Scribe woodwork abutting other components. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET D. Preparation For Site Finishing: 1. Countersink or set exposed fasteners; apply wood filler and sand smooth. 2. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WOOD TRIM FOR PAINT FINISH A. Back prime concealed faces and edges. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints. Do not use pieces shorter than 36 inches except where wall surface is within that limit. C. Scarf running joints. D. Miter outside corners. E. Plane backs of butt joint casings as needed for flush alignment of faces. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Touch up factory -applied primer to correct damage or staining. B. Preparation for Site Finishing: 1. Countersink or set exposed fasteners; apply wood filler and sand smooth. 2. Clean surfaces that receive site finishing to remove dirt, stains, and incompatible substances. 3. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide bituminous dampprofing as indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide protection course, drainage panels and auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. BASF Corp.; www.master-builders-solutions.com. 2. ChemMasters, Inc.; www.chemmasters.net. 3. Euclid Chemical Co., div. of RPM Co.; www.euclidchemcal.com. 4. Henry Company; www.henry.com. 5. Karnak Corporation; www.karnakcorp.com. 6. Tremco Sealants and Waterproofing; www.tremcosealants.com. 7. R. Meadows, Inc.; www.wrmeadows.com. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Basis -of -Design Product: MasterSeal 610, 614, 615 by BASF. 1. her Approved Product: a. Dehydratine 75 Emulsified Asphalt Dampproofing Compounds by Euclid Chemical Co., The; www.euclidchemical.com. b. 789 Fibered Asphalt Emulsion Damp Proofing by Henry Co.; www.henry.com. C. 220 Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing by Karnak Corp.; www.karnakcorp.com. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 0711 13 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET d. Sealmastic Emulsion -Type Dampproofing by W. R. Meadows, Inc.; www.wrmeadows.com. e. Graywall Waterproofing by Rubber Polymer Co.; www.rpcinfo.com. B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D1227, Type Il, Class 1. C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type II, Class 1. D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1. E. Applications: Below -Grade Dampproofing: Provide bituminous coating as a dampproofing layer at earth -side face of concrete planter walls. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. B. Emulsified -Asphalt Primer: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. Board Protection Course: Extruded -polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C578, Type X, 1/2 inch thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, maximum surface moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrates for dampproofing application. B. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any. D. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt -coated glass fabric. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 0711 13 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. ere dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished -grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3.4 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat. B. Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. 3.5 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A. Install protection course over completed -and -cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing- material and protection -course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course over cured coating with spot application of adhesive type recommended in writing by protection -board manufacturer. 2. Install protection course on same day of dampproofing installation (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where panels are subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. B. Correct dampproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, and reapply dampproofing. END OF SECTION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 0711 13 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide water repellents as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project Site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: Show surfaces receiving each water repellent. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: Manufacturer or Independent testing agency test results showing: B. Field Quality Control Submittals: Field test reports. C. Manufacturer Reports: Field test and inspection reports. D. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer and installer. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Manufacturer trained or approved. B. Preconstruction Testing: Test each product. Complete testing 30 days, minimum, before scheduled field installation. C. Field Samples: Apply water repellent to substrate, 8 square feet minimum size. Demonstrate application rate, appearance, and water-repellent performance. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions fall within manufacturer acceptable range. 1.7 COPY OF WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. rranty Includes: a. rranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Dollar Limit: None. WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Interior Concrete Horizontal Surface Topical Water Repellent, Stain- and Urine -Resistant, and Slip -Resistant Treatments, SC-2: Clear, chemical -resistant, aliphatic urethane concrete sealer, with added non -slip sealer. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: TD.455, AUS-V Aliphatic Urethane Coating by Elite Crete Systems; www.elitecrete.com. 2. her approved coating products: a. Ameripolish SR2 Stain Resistor by Ameripolish; www.ameripolish.com. b. Permaguard SPS by L&M Construction Chemicals; www.Imcc.com. 3. Additional Slip -Resistant Concrete Sealer: Apply additional slip -resistant sealer to the stain -resistant concrete sealer. a. Basis -of -Design Product: H&C Sharkgrip Slip -Resistant Additive by H&C Concrete; www.hcconcrete.com. B. Interior Concrete Horizontal Surface Topical Water Repellent and Stain -Resistant Treatment, SC-3: Low -odor, VOC-compliant, topical sealer; low molecular emulsified cross -linking, coupling polymers. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: L&M Construction Chemicals Permaguard SPS. 2. Applications: At back -of -house areas. 2.2 GRAFFITI -RESISTANT PENETRATING WATER REPELLENT A. Water -Based Silicone, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, non -color -enhancing. 1. nufacturers and Products, SC-1: a. Evonik Protectosil ANTIGRAFFITI; as basis of design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. B. Verify surfaces to be coated are properly cured, dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of water repellents. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive water repellents. 2. Protect landscaping and property. B. Remove dust, dirt, oil, grease, chemical films, coatings and other contaminants before application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply even distribution of water repellents. B. Apply manufacturer recommended coat quantity. C. If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately. WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Engage inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to Work areas. 1. Failed Test Retest Cost: Contractor responsibility. 2. Do not begin construction until inspectors have verified compliance of materials. 3. Do not use materials that fail tests and inspections. B. Coverage Test: Saturate with water a repellent -treated surface to verify uniform performance and appearance. 1. Test Location: Architect directed. 2. Test Quantity: Architect directed. C. Non -Conforming Work: Make corrections or replace, and re -test. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sealed surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide thermal insulation as indicated. 2. Provide vapor barriers and vapor retarders as indicated. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: Independent testing agency test results showing: 1. Thermal performance. 2. Surface burning characteristics. 3. Combustibility. 4. Density. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store insulation in dry location, protected from elements. 2. Handle insulation to prevent soiling and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced Glass -Fiber Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johns Manville Formaldehyde -Free Fiberglass Insulation; www.johnsmanville.com. b. Knauf Insulation EcoBatt Insulation; www.knaufinsulation.us. C. Owens Corning EcoTouch Pink Fiberglass Insulation; www.owenscorning.com. THERMAL INSULATION 0721 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET d. approved equal. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. a. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum. b. Smoke Developed Index: 50, maximum. 4. Combustion: Passes ASTM E136. 5. Application: Within stud cavity at walls and above framed ceiling, at all gender Restroom. 2.2 INSULATION ATTACHMENT A. Insulation Adhesives: Products compatible with insulation and substrates, capable of securing insulation to substrate without damaging insulation or substrates. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Insulation manufacturer recommended screws with integrated insulation - retaining washers for attachment through sheathing to metal framing. C. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Galvanized steel self-locking washers. 1. sher Size: Recommended by anchor manufacturer. 2. Attic Applications: Self-locking dome cap for spindle ends. D. Insulation Standoffs: Galvanized steel spacer fit over spindle providing 1 inch space between insulation and substrate. E. Anchor Adhesive: Type recommended by anchor manufacturer for substrate. F. Wire Mesh: 20 gauge galvanized wire hex netting with 2 inch openings. 2.3 VAPOR BARRIER A. Sheet Vapor, Radon and Methane Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 15 mils thick. 1. ter -Vapor Permeance: Not exceeding 0.01 Perms as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745, Section 7.1. B. Approved Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, other available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Vapor Block VB15 by Raven Industries, Inc.; www.ravenefd.com. 2. Stego Wrap 15-Mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC; www.stegoindustries.com. 3. Perminator HP (High Puncture Resistance) 15 Mil Underslab Vapor Barrier by W. R. Meadows, Inc.; www.wrmeadows.com. C. Manufacturer's recommended adhesives and sealants for sealing at overlaps, termination points and penetrations. D. Applications: Below concrete slabs -on -grade; coordinate with Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDER A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyamide film vapor retarder for use with unfaced, vapor permeable glass fiber and mineral wool insulation in wall and ceiling cavities. Material shall have a permeance of 1 perm or less when tested to ASTM E96, dry cup method and permeability shall increase to greater than 10 perms when tested to ASTM E96, wet cup method. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: MemBrain by CertainTeed, Div. of Saint Gobain; THERMAL INSULATION 0721 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON www.certainteed.com. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 1. Latex vapor retarder: Brush, spray, or roller -applied product for use at warm side of framed wall and ceiling assemblies. Perm rating for the vapor retarder paint/primer should be max 1.0 perms (57 ng/Pa*s*m2) per ASTM E96, dry cup method. D. Applications: Exterior walls and ceilings with batt insulation in stud cavity. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates and remove projections and appurtenances that may damage insulation or inhibit adhesion. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Extend insulation to cover entire area shown to be insulated. B. Insulate tightly around obstructions and penetrations. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FRAMED WALL INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation: Fill cavities between framing members with insulation. Snugly fit insulation. 1. Metal -Framed Wall Cavities over 96 Inches High: a. Unfaced Blankets: Apply insulation fasteners to stud faces before installing insulation. 2. Wood -Framed Construction: ASTM C1320. a. Unfaced Blankets: Provide wire mesh, stapled or nailed to wood framing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect insulation from damage due to weather, ultraviolet radiation, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures until permanent construction is completed. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 0721 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide weather barriers as indicated. 1.2 DEFINITIONS SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Air Barrier Sheet Membrane: Air -tight barrier made of material that is water vapor permeable to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces, to stop passage of air and to provide water vapor resistance at above -grade exterior walls and exterior soffits. 1. ter Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa sec sq m) = 1 perm. B. Flexible Flashings: Materials to stop passage of water through above -grade joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and joints between exterior walls and soffits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. B. Compatibility Letter and Chart: 1. Provide a compatibility letter certifying physical and chemical compatibility of products in this Section with all other dampproofing, waterproofing, weather barrier, roofing, self - adhered flashing and sealant products in the Project. Coordinate with the following Sections: a. Section 07 11 13 "Bituminous Dampproofing". b. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". C. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants". 2. Provide input from this Section toward a single Compatibility Chart to be compiled by the General Contractor. Compatibility Chart shall indicate the following: a. All dampproofing, waterproofing, weather barrier, roofing, self -adhered flashing and sealant products. b. ich other products from this group they interface (are in contact with) in the Project. C. The physical and chemical compatibility between those interfaced products. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. F. Product Test Reports: For each air barrier system, provide product test reports for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, and for each class and performance grade indicated. 1. Provide documentation of compliance with air leakage criteria and performance grade required. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET G. Field Inspection and Quality -Control Testing Reports: For each air barrier system, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer inspection performed by manufacturer's authorized representative. 2. Field test reports for tests performed by the Contractor and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air -Barrier Performance: Air -barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. The air leakage rate shall meet State energy Code requirement of 0.25cfm/ft2 at 1.57psf in general accordance with ASTM E779. B. Products produced by a single manufacturer, or certified by the principle manufacturer as compatible with their products, having the properties and performance characteristics to form a contiguous integrated air barrier envelope, and included in the terms of the specified warranty C. General Performance: Membrane air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor -retarding air barrier and as a moisture drainage plane transitioned to adjacent flashings and discharging water to the building exterior. Membrane air barriers shall accommodate substrate movement and seal expansion and control joints, construction material transitions, opening transitions, penetrations, and perimeter conditions without moisture deterioration and air leakage exceeding performance requirements. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design manufacturer: VaproShield USA; www.vaproshield.com. B. Other Approved Manufacturers: 1. Dupont; www.dupont.com. 2. Henry Company; www.henry.com. 3. Soprema; www.soprema.com. 2.3 VAPOR PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER A. Self -Adhered Weather Barrier: Self -adhered, vapor -permeable, water -resistive air barrier membrane consisting of engineered film, permeable adhesive technology and poly -release film; with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Basis -of -Design Product: WrapShield SA by VaproShield. Other Approved Products: Blueskin VP160 Self -Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier by Henry. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET b. Metal Clad Self -Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier by Henry. C. Sopraseal Stick VP by Soprema. 3. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 29 perms; ASTM E96, Method A. 4. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.003 cfm/sq. ft. at 75 Pa when tested according to ASTM E2178. 5. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. a. Applications: For all exterior enclosure, as indicated in Drawings. 2.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high -density polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285 where required. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: PW 100/40 by Protecto Wrap Co.; www.protectowrap.com. 3. Other Approved Products: a. CCW-705-TWF by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, div. of Carlisle Construction Materials; www.carlisleccw.com. b. Perm -A -Barrier by GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; www.gcpat.com. C. Blueskin TWF by Henry Co.; www.henry.com. B. Foil -Faced Butyl Rubber Flashing: Foil -faced composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to an aluminum foil to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285 where required. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Protecto Seal 45 by Protecto Wrap Co.; www.protectowrap.com. 3. Other Approved: a. WaterBlock Foil Faced 40 by Water Block; www.waterblocksystems.com. b. HE200AM Metal Clad Weather Barrier by Henry Co.; www.henry.com. C. Aluma Flash Plus by Poly Wall; www.poly-wall.com. 4. Application: At locations exposed to UV or where joint sealant will be applied. C. High -Temperature Butyl Rubber Flashing: High -temperature composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high -density polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285 where required. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Jiffy Seal Butyl Ice & Water Guard HT by Protecto Wrap Co.; www.protectowrap.com 3. Other Approved Products: a. CCW WIP 300HT High -Temperature Protection Self -Adhering Roofing Under- layment by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, div. of Carlisle Construction Materials; www.carlisleccw.com. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET b. Blueskin PE 200HT High Temperature Roof Underlayment by Henry Co.; www.henry.com. C. Tamko TW-60 by Tamko Building Products LLC; www.tamko.com. 4. Application: At locations below metal roofing, copings, flashings and other metal envelope components. D. Foil -Faced Flashing, Aluminum: Foil -faced composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to an aluminum foil to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285 where required. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Metal Clad Self -Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier by Henry. E. Foil -Faced Flashing, Stainless Steel: Foil -faced composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a Type 304 stainless steel foil to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.010 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285 where required. 2. Approved Products: a. R-Guard SS ThruWall by Prosoco. b. Vapro SS Flashing by VaproShield; www.vaproshield.com. F. Acrylic Flexible Flashing: Pressure -sensitive, self -adhered, waterproof flashing membrane for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: All Weather Flashing Tape 8067 by 3M; www.3m.com. 2. Application: Window jamb and head flashing, and air barrier transitions. 2.5 CAPILLARY BREAK AT SILLS A. Flexible plastic mesh adapted to function as capillary break at top of sill flashing, beneath windows and doors, as indicated. B. Basis -of -Design Product: Plastic Mesh Gutter Guard by Frost King Weatherization Products, div. of Thermwell Products Co., Inc.; www.frostking.com. 2.6 WEATHER BARRIER SEALANT A. Sealants and Backers: As recommended by weather barrier manufacturer or as indicated. B. Provide weather barrier manufacturer's standard sealant at transitions and penetrations. Comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants". 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Dowsil 758 by Dow. C. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials. 2.7 ADHESIVES A. Mastic Adhesive: Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, thick mastic of uniform knife grade consistency. B. Non -Curing Adhesive: Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, permanently non -curing. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details and according to recommendations in ASTM D6135 to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self - adhering, modified bituminous air -barrier sheet produced for low -temperature application. Do not install low -temperature sheet if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. 2. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. B. Prepare, treat, and seal inside and outside corners and vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with termination mastic and according to ASTM D6135. C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air -barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. D. Apply and firmly adhere air -barrier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation. 1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water. 2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate. E. Apply continuous air -barrier sheets over accessory strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. F. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air -barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip. G. Seal exposed edges of sheet at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. H. Install air -barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate air -barrier installation with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. I. Connect and seal exterior wall air -barrier sheet continuously to roofing -membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET J. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air -barrier material to substrate with termination mastic. K. Apply joint sealants forming part of air -barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. L. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact. 1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. M. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air -barrier material with foam sealant. N. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air -barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. O. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency. P. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air -barrier components. 3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flexible Flashings/ Self -Adhering Underlayments: Install continuous air -tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water -resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water -resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.5 CAPILLARY BREAK AT SILLS A. Install capillary break at top of sill flashing, beneath windows and doors, as indicated. Retain in - place until window or door unit is installed by means of intermittent sealant bead or tape oriented in direction of water flow. Do not create a "dam" with sealant or tape that would impede movement of water. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. B. Manufacturer Inspection: Manufacturer's authorized representative shall verify that air barrier system operates and functions properly. 1. Air barrier system will be considered defective if it does not pass inspection. Replace and retest at no cost to Owner. C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. D. Field Quality -Control Testing: 1. Perform a minimum of three (3) tests at each testing mobilization, in determined test areas. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET a. Test each condition and air barrier system type in the project, with a minimum of one test for each type and configuration, and as selected by Architect and/ or Owner's Representative. 2. Test shall be accomplished using either (1) both pressurization and depressurization or (2) pressurization alone, but not depressurization alone. Air barrier system will be considered defective if it does not pass testing. 3. If the tested rate exceeds that required by Code, a visual inspection of the air barrier shall be conducted and any leaks noted shall be sealed to the extent practicable. 4. Upon failure, repair or replace defective system as required, and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Prepare test and inspection reports and provide to Architect as required. 1. Report shall include the tested surface area, floor area, air by volume, stories above grade, and leakage rates to be submitted to the Owner and Code Official. In the event of system failure, an additional report identifying the corrective actions taken to seal air leaks shall be submitted to the Owner and Code Official. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper- or felt -based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 41 13.16 — STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET Provide pre -finished, standing seam metal roof and wall panels, including flashings, trim and accessories, as indicated. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural -support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof - mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details, including coordination with clerestory and parapet fascia, and concealed gutter drainage systems. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For standing -seam panels, including gutters indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel and trim, with factory -applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories. F. Qualification Data: 1. For professional Engineer. 2. For installer. G. Product Test Reports: 1. For each standing seam roofing product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Field quality -control reports. I. Sample Warranties: For all warranties indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll -Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll -forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory -formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll -forming equipment for duration of work. C. Engineer Qualifications: Qualified professional engineer responsible for delegated design, licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. C. Coordinate with flashings, adjacent roofing membranes, air -barrier material transitions, concealed gutter drainage systems, and any other interface in Project. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels watertight and weatherproof with normal usage. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 61 16 "Delegated Design Requirements," to design standing -seam systems,. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated in Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated in Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E1646 or ASTM E331 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. D. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E2140. E. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind - uplift -resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer: Dissimilar Metal Design; www.dmd-world.com. 1. Basis -of -design manufacturer's proprietary exposed finish is required as previously reviewed and approved. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, including technical review and warranty review, and review of appearance of exposed finish as provided in samples for review by Architect, other acceptable manufacturers include the following: 1. AEP Span, a div. of ASC Profiles, Inc.; www.aepspan.com 2. ATAS International, Inc.; www.atas.com. 3. Berridge Manufacturing Co.; www.berridge.com. 4. MBCI, div. of NCI Building Systems; www.mbci.com. 5. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp.; www.metaIsales.us.com. 6. Taylor Metal Products; www.taylormetal.com. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Factory-Patinated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metal intended to be exposed to view, with manufacturer's proprietary finish process. Refer to Finishes articles in this Section for requirements. 1. Basis -of -Design Product, MTL-1: DMD Weathering Steel Finish #140 Series by Dissimilar Metal Design. 2. Finish process shall not adversely affect structural integrity nor stain surfaces below panels, including concrete paved surfaces. 2.4 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS A. General: Provide factory -formed metal roof panels with integral ribs at panel edges; designed for sequential installation by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Configurations: a. Pre -finished, standing seam metal wall and roof panels, including as indicated for canopies. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET b. Pre -finished flashings, trim and accessories. 2. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514. a. Style: Standing seam. 3. Nominal Thickness: 22 gauge, or as approved by Architect. 4. Finish: Refer to Finishes articles in this Section. 5. Panel Profile: Smooth, without deformation lines. 6. Panel Coverage: As indicated in Drawings. 7. Seam and Panel Height: 180 degree seam; height as indicated in Drawings. 8. Finish: Refer to Finishes articles below. B. Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement. 1. Material: 0.064-inch- nominal minimum thickness, zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum - zinc alloy -coated steel sheet. Provide thickness and yield strength as required for performance indicated. C. Application: Wall and roof panels indicated in Drawings. 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT AND VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Underlayment: Provide self -adhering, cold -applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 40 mils thick, consisting of slip -resistant, polyethylene -film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Basis -of -Design Products: a. Underlayment: Grace Ultra by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc.; gcpat.com. b. Vapor Retarder: Grace Ice and Water Shield by GCP. 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D1970. 3. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970. B. Slip Sheet: Underlayment manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645; cold -formed, metallic -coated steel sheet, ASTM A653, G90 (Z275 hot -dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A792, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. Flashings, Gutters and Trim: Refer to requirements of Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed, exterior side of building, including but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim at back of parapet and interior, roof side with same finish system as adjacent metal panels, unless indicated otherwise. D. Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction indicated. 1. Fastener Materials: Stainless steel Type 316. 2. Finish: Exposed fasteners shall have weathered appearance comparable to the base material. E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C1311. F. Attachment Accessories: Manufacturer -approved mechanical securable, slip-on attachment components compatible with systems being attached. 1. Potential future installation of solar photovoltaic power systems and components that utilize approved, industry standard attachment systems. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On -Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on -site using UL-certified, portable roll -forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory -formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Coordinate with requirements of Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 2. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.8 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Factory-Patinated Steel Sheet: Manufacturer's proprietary finish process that mimics the natural, aesthetically pleasing corrosion associated with "weathering steel". Common terms used to describe weathering steel are "Cor-Ten steel" or "corten steel". 1. Description of Weathering Steel for Comparative Purposes Only: Steel sheet metal intended to be exposed to view, without coatings or finishes, and of a chemical composition that anticipates natural, aesthetically pleasing corrosion without adverse effect on structural integrity. a. Grades, for Comparative Purposes Only: 1) Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Original standard designation ASTM A242 (COR-TEN A) and/ or newer ASTM A588 (COR-TEN B). 2) Steel Sheets: ASTM A606. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water -resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT AND VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment and Vapor Retarder: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. For Low -Slope Applications: For slopes of less than 3 in 12, apply over the entire roof surface. 2. For Steep -Slope Applications: For slopes of 3 in 12 and greater, apply over the roof area indicated below: a. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches beyond interior wall line. b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. C. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. e. Roof -to -wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches, and up wall plane for a distance of 18 inches from roof. f. Around penetrating elements and up vertical surfaces for a distance from element of 18 inches, and up vertical plane for a distance of 18 inches from roof. B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. C. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water -resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 8 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 AUGUST 29, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit -penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. E. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self -tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory -applied sealant. 4. Watertight Installation: a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. C. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather -resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 9 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON AUGUST 29, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Refer to Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim," Roof Drainage System Installation for additional requirements. Roof Curbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07 41 13.16 - 10 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 42 13.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide metal composite material wall panels as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project Site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Additional Agenda Items: a. Methods and materials related to preparing substrates for panel installation. b. Special details at flashing, penetrations, openings, corners, copings, and other transition conditions. C. Coordination of continuous insulation installation. d. Cleaning, and repair or replacement procedures for damaged panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Panel materials. 2. Installation system components and profiles. 3. Support girt system components. 4. Initial selection color Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Detail the following: 1. Fabrication and installation layouts. 2. Edge conditions at openings and corners. 3. Penetrations. 4. Flashing, trim and anchorage. 5. Weep locations. C. Samples: 1. Extruded Installation Framing: 12 inch long section. 2. Fabricated Samples: Fabricate finished metal composite material, 12 by 12 inches in size showing finish and return profile on two edges. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittals: 1. Installation system design including support girt system and anchorage to substrate. B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Manufacturer test results showing: 1. Roof edge securement testing. C. Source Quality Control Submittals: Shop test reports. D. Field Quality Control Submittals: Field test reports. E. Manufacturer Reports: Field instruction and inspection reports. F. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Mockups: Construct metal composite material wall panel installation; size and extent shown on Drawings. Demonstrate product interfaces, intersections, and terminations. 1. MCM Roof Edges: Laboratory test mockups per ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435 ES-1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle metal composite material panels to prevent soiling and damage, including bending, warping, twisting, and marring of surfaces. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Warrant against product failure. a. Failure includes panel rupturing, cracking or puncturing, and deterioration of metal. b. Warranty Period: Two years. B. Finish Warranty: Repair deteriorated finishes or replace components. 1. Deterioration includes the following: a. Color Fading: More than 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244. b. Chalking: More than No. 8 rating per ASTM D4214. C. Paint cracking, peeling or checking. 2. Warranty Period: Five years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. 3A Composites USA Inc. 2. Alcoa Architectural Products. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Alpolic div. of Mitsubishi Chemical Group. 2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS A. Basis -of -Design Product: 1. Metal Composite Materials by Alpolic. B. Other Approved Products: 1. Alucobond Plus by 3A Composites USA. 2. Reynobond ACM FIR by Alcoa Architectural Products. C. Aluminum Faced Composite Wall Panels: Two aluminum facings bonded to solid, fire retardant core. 1. Panel Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Face Texture: Smooth. 3. Finish: Color coating. 4. Color: Architect selected. 5. Application: Cladding at infill panel between roof purlins as indicated in Drawings. 2.3 CLADDING SYSTEM A. Installation System: Attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for complete system. 1. Configuration: Face -fastened system. B. Attachment Assembly Components: Extruded aluminum. 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, manufacturer recommended alloy and temper. 2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant screws for anchorage to support girt systems. C. Other System Components: 1. Panel Fasteners: Exposed, face -fastened, non -corroding, self tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. a. Colors: Match MCM panels. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication: Form panel returns and profiles in shop. B. Where needed to minimize oil canning and deflection from wind loads, provide stiffening angles on concealed side. C. Fabricate panels with consistent grain directionshown on Shop Drawings. D. Form sections to shapes shown on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. E. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer -standard fluoropolymer finish meeting AAMA 2605; finish warranty period 20 years. Provide one of the following finish systems: 1. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, three -coat, with suspended metallic flakes, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET weight in color coat and clear topcoat. a. Approved PVDF Resin Products: 1) Hylar 5000 by Solvay; www.solvay.com. 2) Kynar 500 byArkema: www.kynar500.com. b. Approved Fluoropolymer Coating Products: 1) Duranar by PPG IdeaScapes; www.ppgideascapes.com. 2) Fluropon by Valspar Corp., div. of The Sherwin-Williams Co.; www.valsparcoilextrusion.com. 2. Fluoroethylene Vinyl Ether (FEVE) Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, three -coat, with suspended metallic flakes, fluoropolymer finish containing 100 percent FEVE resin in color coat. a. Approved FEVE Fluoropolymer Coating Products: 1) Lumiflon by AGC Chemicals Americas; www.agcchem.com. 3. Exposed Colors: a. Custom solid color, as selected and approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify substrate installation and air barrier application is complete and tested per Section 07 27 00. 2. Verify framing members are ready to receive panel systems. 3. Verify penetrating items are ready for cladding system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Girt System: Install per ASTM C754 in orientation, sizes, and locations shown on shop drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Fasten panel support assembly to girt system. B. Install panels in locations, spacings, and orientation shown on Drawings. Anchor panels securely. 1. Flat panel, non -edge captured, face -fastened. C. Accommodate thermal and structural movement without failure. D. Erection Tolerances: 1. Offset Between Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch, maximum. 2. Variation from Plane or Location: 1/4 inch in 20 feet, maximum, non cumulative. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. C. Clear weep holes and drainage channels. END OF SECTION METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Coil -coated sheet metal. 2. Initial selection color charts. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Show fabrication and profiles for each item. 2. Show base metals, thicknesses, and finishes. 3. Include attachment and connection details. 4. Include details for corners, changes in plane, expansion joints, and terminations. 5. Show locations of expansion joints. 6. Copings and Roof Edge Fascia Trim: Include NRCA tested design information. C. Samples: 1. Copings and Roof Edge Fascia Trim: lengths in required finish. 12 inch lengths in required finish. 2. Prepatinated to match standing seam wall and roof panels: 12 inch long sections in required finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Fabricator: Certify that copings and roof edge fasciae trim are ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435 ES-1 tested. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: Sheet metal finish, Roof edge warranty, and Coping warranty. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. alifications: 1. Fabricators: Listed by UL, FM, or other agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction to fabricate copings and roof edge fascia per NRCA tested designs to meet ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435 ES-1 securement requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials elevated above grade, protected from precipitation and stormwater runoff. 2. Handle fabrications to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion. 3. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Include roof edges and coping in warranty for roofing system specified in Section 07 41 13.16. B. Finish Warranty: Repair deteriorated finishes or replace components. 1. Deterioration includes the following: a. Color Fading: More than 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244. b. Chalking: More than No. 8 rating per ASTM D4214. C. Paint cracking, peeling or checking. 2. rranty Period: Ten years. C. Installer Warranty: 1. Copings and Roof Edge Fascia: Warrant against installation failure. a. Failure includes damage by wind under stated wind design speed or thermal movement. b. rranty Period: Two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Design Wind Load Criteria: See Structural Drawings. B. Environmental Performance: 1. Expansion and Contraction: Withstand thermal cycling over 120 degrees F ambient and 180 degrees F on material surfaces. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet, FSM-1, FSM-2 and FSM-4: ASTM A653; structural steel sheet, 18 gauge, G90 zinc galvanized. 1. Finish: Prepatinated to match standing seam wall and roof panels with AAMA 2605 with manufacturer's standard polyester finished back. 2. Applications: Provide where stainless steel are not required. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240; 16 gauge, Type 316, dead soft fully annealed. 1. Surface: Smooth and Flat. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Finish:2D. 3. Applications: Provide at concealed and built-in conditions. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as item being fastened, with soft neoprene washers where exposed. B. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. C. Concealed Sealant: Butyl, ASTM C1311. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Pecora Corporation BA-98. b. Tremco Butyl Sealant. C. approved equal. D. Exposed Sealant: See Section 07 92 00. E. Separation Coating: Bituminous paint; SSPC-Paint 12. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabrication Reference Standards: 1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 2. NRCA Roofing Manual. B. Form section shapes shown on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet metal, interlocking with sheet. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Moving Joints: Sealed lapped, bayonet -type, or interlocking hooked seams. F. Non Moving Joints: Sealed watertight. G. Fabricate corners, changes in plane, and terminations in shop with minimum 18 inch legs. H. Counterflashing: 1. terial: a. Ivanized Steel; SMACNA recommended base metal thickness. b. Aluminum -Zinc -Coated Steel; SMACNA recommended base metal thickness. 2. Fabricate to extend minimum 4 inches over protected construction, with hemmed bottom drip edge. 3. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. I. Roof Edge Fascia Trim, EDGE FASCIA TRIM: Fabricate per NRCA details for tested designs. 1. terial: a. Ivanized Steel; SMACNA recommended base metal thickness. b. Aluminum -Zinc -Coated Steel; SMACNA recommended base metal thickness. 2. Length: 8 to 12 ft long units. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Joints: Butt joints with 6 inch concealed backing plate. 4. Scuppers: Fabricate fascia with scuppers that extend 4 inches beyond fascia and have drip edge. 2.5 METALLIC -COATED STEEL FINISHES A. Weathering Steel/ Prepatinated Finish: Preweather to match standing seam metal wall and roof panels, using process similar to that manufacturer, applied in a consistent and continuous fashion to create a uniform weathered appearance. Avoid streakiness, blotchiness or other distinct imperfections. Match approved sample. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that roof openings, penetrations, and curbs through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify that roofing base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed uncoated metal surfaces with 15 mil minimum thickness separation coating. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Reference Standards: 1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 2. NRCA Roofing Manual. B. Install flashing with concealed fasteners. C. Secure fabrications with concealed fasteners where possible. D. Apply plastic cement between metal and bituminous materials. E. Separate dissimilar metals with separation coating or non absorptive gaskets. F. Counterflashing: Install counterflashing in contact with base flashing. 1. Anchor counterflashing in reglets with wedges and apply sealant to joint per Section 07 9200. 2. Drill counterflashing installed with surface mounted reglets so that anchorage fasteners go through the sheet metal. Apply sealant to back side of top edge and fasten reglet to wall construction. Apply sealant to top edge per Section 07 92 00. 3. Lap ends of counterflashing minimum 6 in. G. Edge Fascia Trim: Coordinate installation with roofing system to provide watertight protection for wall. 1. Install trim in straight lines with accurately aligned profiles. 2. Apply sealant to both edges of backing plates at joints. 3. Install anchorage base and cleats with screws. 4. Install fascia with continuous cleat. 5. Install covers with full engagement of anchorage cleats and uniform joint width. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.4 CLEANING SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Remove soiling, stains, and hand prints. B. Uncoated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Remove substances that would impair paint bond. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide joint sealants as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month minimum before starting Work of this Section for exterior building sealants. 2. Additional Attendees: a. Installers of exterior building sealants. b. azing system installer. C. Air barrier installer. d. Roofing installer. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: 1. Provide submittals for all sealants, exterior and interior, in a single group, regardless of how many subcontractors will install sealants. Multiple submittals for sealants are not acceptable. B. Product Data: 1. Each sealant type. 2. Expanding tape seals. 3. Initial selection color charts. C. Joint Sealant Schedule: 1. Joint types. 2. Joint locations. 3. Sealant types and proprietary products. 4. Joint sealant colors. D. Samples: 1. Cured sealant custom color ribbons; 12 inches minimum length. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Provide written verification and list of products for Work under subsequent work JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET packages that the same proprietary sealants will be used that were used for previous work packages. B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Manufacturer testing results. 1. Compatibility between sealant and substrate and priming requirements for each substrate and sealant; test per ASTM C794. 2. For Applications Indicating Porous Stone: Staining potential; test perASTM C1248. C. Field Quality Control Submittals: Field inspection reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Warranty Documentation: Sealants. 1.6 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 2. Testing Agencies: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. B. Mockups: Install sealants in exterior wall mockups. Demonstrate product interfaces, intersections, and terminations. 1. Adhesion: Test sealant joints in mockup perASTM C1193, Method A in Appendix X1.1 or ASTM C1521, Method A. At joints between different materials, test each joint surface separately. 2. Approved mockups establish work results standard. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Perform work within following limitations. 1. Temperature: Perform work within sealant manufacturer published temperature limits. 2. Precipitation: None occurring and none predicted within 48 hours. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Exterior Sealants: Warrant joint sealants will provide a watertight weather seal for the Warranty duration. a. Failure includes loss of elastomeric properties and required performance attributes. b. For porous substrates, failure also includes discoloration of substrates. C. Warranty Period, Urethanes: Five years. d. Warranty Period, Silicones: 20 years. e. Warranty Period, Class 25 Acid -Curing Silicones: Ten years. f. Warranty Period, Hybrid Urethane and STP Sealants: 20 years. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS - GENERAL A. Source Control: Provide one proprietary product for each type of sealant required, regardless of what Subcontractor installs the sealant. 1. Installers of joint sealants under subsequent work packages must use the same proprietary sealants used in the first work package that includes joint sealants. B. Select proprietary sealants for compatibility with other construction products that the sealants will contact. C. Multiple colors may be required for exposed sealants to coordinate with substrate colors. 2.2 EXTERIOR EXPOSED NONTRAFFIC SEALANTS A. Class 100/50 Silicone Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Dow DOWSIL 790. b. Construction Sealants SCS2700 SilPruf. LM. C. Pecora Corporation 895NST. d. Sika Sikasil WS-290 FPS. e. Tremco Spectrem 1. f. approved equal. 2. Colors: Architect selected. 3. Applications: Exterior, non -porous, dissimilar materials. B. Multi -Part Class 50 Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Pecora Corporation DynaTrol Il. b. Tremco Dymeric 240FC. C. approved equal. 2. Color: Architect selected. 3. Applications: Interior horizontal concrete joints. 2.3 EXTERIOR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC SEALANTS A. Pourable Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Sika Sikaflex SL2. b. Pecora Corporation DynaTrol II-SL. 2. Colors: Architect selected. 3. Applications: Exterior horizontal concrete joints. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2.4 INTERIOR SEALANTS AND CAULKING A. Sanitary Sealant: Mildew -resistant silicone; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 or greater, Use NT. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Dow DOWSIL 786 SILICONE SEALANT. b. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST. C. Tremco Incorporated Tremsil 200 Sanitary. d. approved equal. 2. Colors: Architect selected. 3. Applications: a. Joints around plumbing fixtures and fittings. B. Paintable Caulking: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Pecora Corporation AC20. b. Sika MasterSeal NP 520. C. Tremco Tremflex 834. d. approved equal. 2. Applications: a. Interior joints noted as caulking. b. Joints, crevices, and irregularities wider than hairline joints in or between dissimilar materials and painted surfaces. C. Perimeters of door frames, frames and trim for glazing, and frames or trim for other wall and ceiling openings at painted surfaces. d. II and ceiling joints between structural CLT panels. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Primer: As required by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Backer Rod: ASTM C1330, Type C, closed -cell or Type O, open -cell, manufacturer recommended types. C. Bond Breaker Tape: Self-adhesive plastic tape to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. D. Cleaners: Manufacturer recommended types. E. Masking: Non -staining, self-adhesive. 2.6 MIXES A. Multicomponent Sealants: Mix components immediately before use. B. Field -Tinted Products: Mix colorant with base to uniform consistency and custom color. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean joint surfaces for optimum adhesion. Remove dirt, moisture, and incompatible substances. B. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. D. Existing Joints: Cut out and remove existing joint sealants down to original substrate. Small amounts of elastomeric sealants left in surface irregularities of concrete and masonry may be left in place subject to Architect approval, provided that they are securely bonded to surface, are compatible with new sealant, and are tested to demonstrate that suitable adhesion with new sealant can be achieved. Where these conditions cannot be met, remove existing sealants completely. E. Prime joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Protect adjacent surfaces from misapplication or spillage of primer. F. Mask surfaces adjacent to joints to receive elastomeric sealants. Remove masking after tooling. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Reference Standard: Follow ASTM C1193. B. General Installation Requirements: 1. Exterior Joint Sealants: Provide continuous, weatherproof seals to prevent infiltration of air and water through the joints. 2. Interior Joint Sealants: Provide continuous seals to prevent air infiltration through the joints in which they are installed. Install sanitary sealant to prevent water infiltration. 3. Appearance: Apply sealants with smooth surfaces free of gaps, voids, bubbles, lumps, crevices, runs, drips, striations, and other irregularities. C. Set joint filler units at uniform depths in joints to support sealants and maintain proper sealant cross section shape and depth recommended by manufacturer for each application. D. Set joint filler for sealant neck dimension 1/3 of joint width, maximum, or as recommended by manufacturer for application. E. Install joint fillers under compression and friction fit. Do not install filler units that have absorbed water. 1. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint filler units. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. 3. Remove joint fillers that have absorbed moisture or which have ruptured gas cells and install suitable new fillers before sealant application. F. Install bond breaker tape where shown on Drawings or where joint filler is not used to prevent adhesion to back of joint. G. Deposit sealants in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets. H. Tool sealants to ensure full adhesion. Form smooth, slightly concave surface. I. Cure joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean spills, misapplications, and material migrations immediately as they occur. B. Clean marred surfaces by whatever means are necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide hollow metal doors and frames as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with gypsum board partitions and finish painting. B. Preinstallation Meetings: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Attendees: partition installers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1. Hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Factory Finishes: Color charts for initial selection. B. Shop Drawings: Show construction, sizes, configurations, reinforcements, anchorages, installation details. 1. Door elevations showing cutouts. 2. Door frame elevations. 3. Hardware mounting locations. C. Door Schedule: Use same designations as Drawings. 1. Show door and frame types, sizes, ratings, glazing, and hardware sets. D. Samples. 1. Factory Finish: 3 by 5 inches, minimum applied to specified metal. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers: SDI Certified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle door frames maintaining spreader bars in place until installation. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES - EXTRA HEAVY DUTY A. Doors: ANSI/SDI A250.8; 1-3/4 inch thick. 1. Applications: Exterior doors. 2. Classification: Level 3, Physical Performance Level A. 3. Model: 1, Full Flush. 4. Faces: Steel sheet, 0.053 inch thick, G90 coating. 5. Core: Insulated. 6. Top and Bottom Edges: Closure channel, top edge sealed watertight. B. Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Material: Steel sheet, 0.067 inch thick, coating matching door face. 2. Construction: Full profile welded, mitered corners. 3. Thermal Break: Manufacturer standard. 4. Profile Depth: Coordinate frame depth and stop location with requirements for wood cladding and substrate at exterior face of hollow metal doors. 5. Primed for field painted finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE A. Performance Requirements: 1. Exterior Doors: B2030. B. Environmental Performance: Exterior doors. 1. Water Penetration: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440; no leakage at 2.92 psf pressure differential. 2. Thermal Transmission: U-0.37, maximum. 3. Expansion and Contraction: Withstand 120 degree F ambient and 180 degree F surface thermal cycling without failure. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; hot -dip galvannealed or galvanized coating. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer standard. 1. Steel Coating: ASTM Al53/A153M hot -dip galvanized. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. 1. Reinforce doors and frames for surface applied hardware without through bolting. 2. Hardware Locations: ANSI A250.8. B. Door Edges: Square, as indicated. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with flush roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head. D. Prepare interior frames for silencers, except where sound seals or smoke seals are specified. 1. Single Door Strike Jambs: 3 silencers. 2. Paired Door Heads: 2 silencers. E. Frame Mullions for Double Doors: 1. Fixed: Profile matching jambs. 2. Removable: See Section 08 71 00. F. Fabrication Tolerances: SDI-117. 2.5 FINISHES A. Primer Materials: ANSI/SDI A250.10, rust inhibiting. B. Finish Materials: ANSI/SDI A250.3. 1. Color: Architect selected. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Galvanizing Repair Materials: ASTM A780/A780M. B. Weatherstripping: See Section 08 71 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify opening sizes are within tolerance limits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames. Follow ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Fire Rated Doors: NFPA 80. B. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate door frame and anchor installation with gypsum board and CLT panels jamb construction. 2. Coordinate door and frame installation with door hardware installation. See Section 08 71 00. Install silencers before installing frame. 3. Coordinate removable stop installation with glass installation. See Section 08 80 00. C. Install steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor channels to overhead structure and floor. D. Installation Tolerances: SDI-117. E. Repair damaged zinc coatings. Follow ASTM A780/A780M. F. Seal door frames to adjacent wall and partition construction. See Section 07 92 00. G. Field paint doors and frames. See Section 09 90 00. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Ensure fire rated doors self close and latch. END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 08 31 00 -ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide access doors and panels as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations with controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar items requiring operation that are located behind finished surfaces. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, fire resistance listings, and details of adjoining Work. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Locations and sizes of wall and ceiling access doors. 2. Locations and sizes of floor doors and cellar doors. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of access doors and panels. B. Maintenance data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Gypsum Board Access Doors: Flush door with frame flanges concealed by gypsum board joint finishing compound. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Babcock -Davis BNW. b. Karp Associates KDW. C. Icor DW. d. Nystrom NW. e. Iliams Brothers Corporation of America WB DW 400 Series. f. approved equal. 2. terial: Steel sheet; ASTM A879. a. Door: 0.062 in. thick, nominal. b. Frame: 0.062 inch thick, nominal. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 0831 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON C. Finish: Factory primed. 3. Material: Stainless steel sheet; ASTM A666, Type 304. a. Door and Frame: 0.063 inch thick, nominal. b. Finish: #4 satin polish. 4. Hinges: Continuous. 5. Latches: Keyed cam lock operation. 6. Accessories: a. Gasketing. b. Masonry anchors. 7. Applications: Interior wall and ceiling locations. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008, cold rolled. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2.3 FABRICATION A. Welded Units: Fabricate units of continuous welded construction; weld, fill, and grind exposed joints flush and smooth. B. Size Variations: Obtain acceptance of manufacturers standard size units which vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled. C. Provide manufacturers recommended anchorage fasteners for Project applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for access doors and panels are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Secure frames rigidly in place, plumb and level in opening, with plane of door and panel face parallel to adjacent finished surface. 1. Set concealed frame type units flush with adjacent finished surfaces. B. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed Work requiring access. END OF SECTION ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 0831 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide overhead coiling doors as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate installation of Work for support and anchorage of overhead coiling doors. 2. Coordinate power and control wiring for electrically operated doors. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Additional Attendees: Installers of power and control wiring. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Each type of overhead coiling door, including tracks and hardware. 2. Motor operators, controls, and obstruction detection devices. 3. Automatic release devices for fire shutters. 4. Initial selection color charts. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Each overhead coiling door type. 2. Support and anchorage details. C. Door Schedule: Use same designations as Drawings. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. B. Warranty documentation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Factory trained and authorized. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant doors against defects in material and workmanship. 1. Overhead Coiling Doors: Warrant against product failure. a. Failure Includes: Defects in materials and workmanship. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET b. Warranty Period: 5 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR OVERHEAD COILING DOORS A. Insulated Exterior Overhead Coiling Doors: ANSI/DASMA 203. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: a. Overhead Door Corp Rolling Service Door, Model 610. 2. Operation Cycles: 20 cycles per day; 20,000 cumulative with tamperproof counter. 3. Air Infiltration: 1.0 cfm/sf, maximum at 25 mph wind speed, tested per ASTM E283. 4. Door Curtains: Interlocking roll -formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. a. Slats: Flat, 2-5/8 in. wide. b. Material: 18 gauge galvanized steel for doors 25 ft. 4 in. to 40 ft. 0 in. wide. C. Vision Panels: Approximately 10 by 1-5/8 inch oval acrylic panes; see Drawings for number and layout. d. Insulation: Minimum R- 7.5 minimum. e. Interior Facing: Same material and finish as exterior. f. Perimeter Weather Seals: Vinyl bottom seal only. g. Galvanized Steel Finish: Factory applied baked enamel. 1) Color: Architect selected. 5. Operation: Electric. B. Wall Mounting Condition: Face -of -wall mounting. 2.2 COMMON COMPONENTS A. Hoods: 1. Material, Finish: 24 gauge galvanized steel with intermediate supports as required.. 2. Shape: Manufacturer standard. B. Bottom Bars: 1. Material, Finish: PowderGuard system; black standard unless otherwise indicated by Architect. 2. Type: Heavy duty. 3. Configuration: Two primed steel angles for doors over 15 ft. 4 in. (4.67 m) wide. 4. Supply sloped bottom bar at doorways with cross slope pavement. C. Jamb Guides: 1. Material, Finish: Same as curtain. 2. Endlocks for Exterior Doors: As recommended for door size and operation. D. Counterbalances: Adjustable enclosed helical torsion spring with grease sealed ball bearings or self lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET E. Locking: Interior slide bolt lock for electric operation with interlock switch.. 1. Provide interlock switches on motor operated units. F. Motor Operators: 1. ar reduced type, mounted on head shaft. 2. Sufficient power to operate door. 3. nually operable in case of power failure. 4. Electrical Characteristics: 115 or 230 VAC, single phase. 5. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted on equipment. G. Controls: 1. Control Station: Surface mounted momentary contact keyed switch station marked OPEN, CLOSE, and STOP. a. Keys: Supply four keys per station. 2. Automatic Re -Opening: Electric sensing strip on bottom bar and photoelectric sensors that immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to fully opened position when obstruction is detected. 3. Applications: Controls for exterior location. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. Delegate overhead door design to manufacturer licensed Professional Engineer. B. Wind Loads: Standard wind load shall be 20 PSF. 2.4 FINISHES A. Slats and Hood Finish: 1. Ivanized Steel: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and receive rust -inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked -on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked -on polyester top coat. a. Polyester Top Coat: As selected by Architect. b. Powder Coat: As selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that Work for structural support and anchorage is adequate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors plumb and parallel to supporting walls. B. Anchor door tracks and operators rigidly and securely to prevent movement during door operation. C. Install doors to operate smoothly without binding or distortion. D. Install perimeter gaskets to provide continuous seals and for uniform compression. E. Electrically Operated Doors: 1. ke wiring connections between power supply and operator and between operator and OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET controls. 2. Adjust limit switches for accurate movement. 3. Adjust obstruction detection controls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Engage inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to Work areas. 1. Failed Test Retest Cost: Contractor responsibility. B. Testing: 1. Test obstruction detection controls. 2. Test automatic closing of fire shutters. C. Non -Conforming Work: Make corrections or replace, and retest. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean factory primed surfaces of soiling and substances that affect subsequent finish painting. 3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Coordinate demonstration with Owner staff. 1. Demonstrate operation of electrically operated doors. 2. Demonstrate testing and resetting procedure for fire shutters. END OF SECTION OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 08 35 13 - FOLDING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide folding doors as indicated. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate sill track drainage with plumbing Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Folding door system, components, and hardware. 2. Initial selection color Samples. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Track, support and anchorage details. 3. Sill track relation to finish flooring and drainage. 4. Hardware and finishes. C. Samples: 1. Stiles: 12-inch lengths in required finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: Manufacturer test results. B. Impact resistance approval notice. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. B. Warranty documentation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Trained and acceptable to folding door manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain protective film to protect product. Remove upon Substantial Completion. FOLDING DOORS 08 35 13 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Temperature: Perform Work within manufacturer recommended limitations. B. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant against product failure. 1. Folding Doors: Warrant against defects in materials and workmanship, including operation and hardware failure. 2. Insulating Glass: Warrant against glass seal failure, including misting or dusting between panes. 3. rranty Period: Ten years. B. Color Finish Warranty: Repair deteriorated finishes or replace components. 1. Deterioration includes the following: a. Color Fading: More than 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244. b. Chalking: More than No. 8 rating per ASTM D4214. C. Paint cracking, peeling or checking. 2. rranty Period: Ten years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE RATED FOLDING DOORS 2.2 METAL FOLDING DOORS A. Metal Folding Doors: 1. nufacturers and Products: Electrically Operated Folding Door by Findoor. B. Bi-parting; folds to both side at proscenium. C. Color: To match corten, as selected by Architect. D. Operating Hardware: 1. Electrically powered doors including capability to send and receive signals from control systems. a. for Operator Assembly including a DC gear -motor, drive sprocket, clutch, and position sensors. 1) Motor drives the door by chain. 2) Standard motor drive speed of 18 inches per second. b. Leading Edge: Pressure sensitive, when contact is made with an obstruction, door will stop, pause for a minimum of 3 seconds, then re -close when in alarm mode. 2. Locking: Manufacturer's standard locking hardware, as selected by Architect. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. nd Load Criteria: See Structural Drawings. FOLDING DOORS 08 35 13 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. Seismic Criteria: See Structural Drawings. C. Accessibility Requirements: Applicable provisions in Department of Justice publication 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. D. Environmental Performance: 1. ter Penetration: No uncontrolled water leakage per ASTM E331 at 9 psf static air differential pressure. 2. Expansion and Contraction: Withstand 120 degree F ambient and 180 degree F surface thermal cycling without failure. a. Resist buckling stress on glass, joint sealant failure, damaging loads on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, and reduction in performance. E. Fire Resistance: 1. Test: NFPA252 or UL 10C. 2. Labeling: NFPA 80. F. Acoustic Performance: 1. TC. 2. STC. 3. NRC. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble door panels and other components. B. Factory glaze door panels. C. Fabricate full contact hairline joints with no visible uncoated aluminum. 2.5 FINISHES A. Anodizing: AAMA 611 Class I or AAMA 612 with electrodeposition organic seal. B. Contractor Option: Use two coat liquid or one coat powder fluoropolymer coating. C. Powder Coating: One coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 2604. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. IFS Coatings IFS 400SD. 2. Color: Architect selected. D. Powder Coating: One coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 2605. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. IFS Coatings IFS 500FP. b. Akzo Nobel Interpon D3000 or D3020. 2. Color: Architect selected. E. Color Coating: Two coat fluoropolymer finish with minimum 70 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in color; AAMA 2605. F. Mica Coating: Two or Three coat fluoropolymer finish with minimum 70 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in color coat; AAMA 2605. G. tallic Coating: Three or Four coat fluoropolymer finish with minimum 70 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in color coat and clear coat; AAMA 2605. FOLDING DOORS 08 35 13 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET H. Contractor Option: Interior surfaces may receive powder or acrylic coating that matches color of exterior finish. 1. Acrylic Coating for Interior Surfaces: Thermoset enamel; AAMA 2603 but 1.5 mil thickness. 2. Powder Coating: Thermoset polyester; AAMA 2603 but 1.5 mil minimum thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structural supports for folding panel doors are complete. B. Verify that rough openings sizes, squareness, and floor levelness and flatness are within manufacturer recommended tolerances. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install folding door system with flashing and waterproof perimeter seals. B. Install folding door system plumb, level, and accurately aligned. C. Anchor components to structural elements. D. Adjust door panels and hardware for smooth, accurate movement and secure locking. E. Connect drainable sill track to rain water piping. 3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Engage factory authorized service representative to train Owner maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain folding panel doors. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Where doors are used for construction traffic, provide sill finish protection. END OF SECTION FOLDING DOORS 08 35 13 - 4 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors". D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series. 2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. ANSI/UL 294 - Access Control System Units. 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 5. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 1.3 SUBMITTALS 2433000 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing, fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. C. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 2433000 D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Provide record documentation of as -built door hardware sets in digital format (.pdf, .docx, .xIsx, .csv) and as required in Division 01, Project Record Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD). C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. Requirements for key control storage and software. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". i �4Colo C -011► _ ep A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre -wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in -field modifications. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 1.8 WARRANTY 2433000 A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hardware shall not have any visible manufacturer names on exposed materials, except cylinders, when the door is in a closed position. 2.2 BUTT HINGES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1" to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non -removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for all out -swinging lockable doors. Manufacturers: a. McKinney (MK) - TA/T4A Series, 5-knuckle. 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with MolexT"' standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through -door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Manufacturers: a. Pemko (PE) - EL-CEPT Series. b. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through - door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through -door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. Manufacturers: a. McKinney (MK) - QC-C Series. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. 1. Manufacturers: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA a. dormakaba BEST (BE). b. Match Existing, Field Verify. C. No Substitution. B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types: 1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks. 4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks. 5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 6. Keyway: Manufacturer's Standard. C. Small Format Interchangeable Cores: Provide small format interchangeable cores (SFIC) as specified, core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel -silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Field verify and key cylinders to match Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3). 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). 4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2). 5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2). F. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores. G. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.5 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed mortise locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. Provide locksets with functions and features as follows: a. Heavy duty 12-gauge wrought steel case. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 2433000 b. Stainless steel 3/4" one-piece anti -friction reversible latchbolt with a one-piece hardened stainless steel 1" projection deadbolt. C. Where required by code, provide knurling or abrasive coating on all levers leading to hazardous areas. d. Meets UL and CUL Standard 10C Positive Pressure, Fire Test of Door Assemblies with levers that meet A117.1 Accessibility Code. e. Meets UL Certification Directory ZHLL.R21744 for products used in windstorm rated assemblies. f. Status indicators inside, outside, or on both sides of doors as specified; available with wording for "locked/unlocked", "vacant/occupied" or custom wording options. Indicator to be located above the cylinder with the inside thumb -turn not blocking the visibility of the indicator status. g. Ten-year limited warranty for mechanical functions. Electromechanical locksets shall have the following functions and features: a. Universal Molex plug-in connectors that have standardized color -coded wiring and are available in fail safe or fail secure and operate from 12vdc to 24vdc regulated. b. EcoFlex or equivalent technology that reduces energy consumption up to 92% as certified by GreenCircle. C. Options to be available for request -to -exit or enter signaling, latchbolt and deadbolt monitoring. d. Two-year limited warranty on electrified functions. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML2000 Series. b. dormakaba BEST (BE) - 45H Series. C. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series. 2.6 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed cylindrical locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. Provide locksets with functions and features as follows: a. Meets ANSI/BHMA A156.41 for single motion egress. b. Where required by code, provide knurling or abrasive coating on all levers leading to hazardous areas. C. Meets UL and CUL Standard 10C Positive Pressure, Fire Test of Door Assemblies with levers that meet A117.1 Accessibility Code. d. Exceeds ANSI/BHMA A156.2 requirements by 2.6 times for 3,100 in -lb. abusive locked lever torque with no entry while maintaining egress. e. Exceeds ANSI/BHMA A156.2 requirements by 8 times for 1,600 lbs. offset lever pull with no entry for protection against attacks. f. Exceeds ANSI/BHMA A156.3 requirements by 2 times for latch retraction with 100 lb. preload while maintaining operation in warped doors. g. Exceeds ANSI/BHMA A156.3 requirements by 20 times for no access with minimum 100 vertical impacts for protection against vandalism attempts. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA h. Independent return springs allow lock to exceed ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 cycle requirements without lever sag. i. Ten-year limited warranty for mechanical functions. 2. Electromechanical locksets shall have the following functions and features: a. Universal Molex plug-in connectors that have standardized color -coded wiring and are field configurable in fail safe or fail secure and operate from 12vdc to 24vdc regulated. b. EcoFlex or equivalent technology that reduces energy consumption up to 92% as certified by GreenCircle. C. Options to be available for request -to -exit or enter signaling. d. Two-year limited warranty on electrified functions. 3. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - CLX3300 Series. b. dormakaba BEST (BE) - 9K Series. C. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 10X Line. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat -Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra -Long -Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum -Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double -lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al56.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al56.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA Al56.16. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty. 2. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 2433000 3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements. 4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2" wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed exit devices. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. Provide exit devices with functions and features as follows: a. Where required by code, provide knurling or abrasive coating on all levers leading to hazardous areas. b. Meets UL and CUL Standard 10C Positive Pressure, Fire Test of Door Assemblies with levers that meet A117.1 Accessibility Code. C. No catch points: addition of applied deflectors or other added components are not allowed. d. No visible plastic. e. Concealed hex key dogging with an active or passive dogging indicator where specified that shows visible indication of secured state. f. Chassis indicators as specified that show secured state of exterior trim. g. Heavy duty end caps with flush and overlapping options made of stainless steel, brass, or bronze with architectural finishes. h. Constructed of all stainless steel. i. Stainless steel pullman type latch with deadlock feature. j. Narrow or wide style exterior trim as specified in the hardware sets. k. Where specified provide shelter -in -place function that lets you secure a room instantly by pressing a red button on the interior of the device chassis which immediately locks the outside trim. Occupants can still exit by pushing the exit bar from the inside or using an override key on the outside trim, which resets the shelter function. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA 2433000 I. Center case adjustability on concealed vertical rod exit devices; single operation with hex key individually adjusts top or bottom latches. No retainer screws or clips required to maintain adjustment. M. Ten-year limited warranty for mechanical features. Electromechanical exit devices shall have the following functions and features: a. Universal Molex plug-in connectors that have standardized color -coded wiring and are field configurable in fail safe or fail secure and operate from 12vdc to 24vdc regulated. b. Wire routing for all non -access control electromechanical functions and EcoFlex trim to be contained within the carrier of the device eliminating the need for cavities in doors to be drilled. Include a protective film so that wires don't get damaged if the rail needs to be removed. C. EcoFlex or equivalent technology that reduces energy consumption up to 92% as certified by GreenCircle. d. Options to be available for request -to -exit or enter signaling, latchbolt and touchbar monitoring. e. Field configurable electrified trim to fail-safe or fail -secure that operates from 12- 24VDC. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - PED4000 / PED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - PE80 Series. 2.9 SURFACE DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non -handed with full sized covers. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through -bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non -critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non -handed units standard.. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC6000 Series. b. Norton Rixson (NO) - 7500 Series. C. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. 2.10 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1" LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16" above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood (RO). 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non -corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA D. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: Pemko (PE) 2.12 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Intelligent Switching Power Supplies: Provide the least number of power supplies at the appropriate amperage level sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. Power supplies shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. a. UL listed dual voltage 12 or 24 VDC field selectable continuous output. b. Dedicated fast charger to prolong battery life with low battery cutoff to protect batteries from deep discharge. C. Enhanced surge immunity for input/output protection d. Separate, dedicated battery charging circuit to keep locks cooler. e. Dual -color LED visual notification to prevent applying incorrect voltages to the power supply. f. Instant auto -switch to battery on AC loss. g. Expandable up to 16 outputs in the standard enclosure h. Integrated fire alarm interface to allow main output shutdown or disconnect on a per output basis when using an R8 output module. i. Network ready and remotely manage locks and connected devices when using an M8 managed output module on network models. j. Lifetime replacement, no-fault, no questions asked warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQL Series. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.14 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA D. Push Plates and Door Pulls: When through -bolt fasteners are in the same location as a push plate, countersink the fasteners flush with the door face allowing the push plate to sit flat against the door. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. t. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II 2433000 RENTON, WA B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. SU - Securitron 3.SA-SARGENT 4. BE - BEST Locks & Closers 5. RO - Rockwood 6. PE - Pemko 7. OT - Other Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 100 3 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt T4A3386xNRP US32D M 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 630 SU 1 Fail Secure Exit Device 72 PE8876 WEL US32D SA 1 Permanent Keyed Core Verify & match owners existing 626 BE 1 Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" CS US32D RO 1 Gasketing (Head) 2891AS PE 2 Gasketing (Jambs) 290AS PE 1 Door Bottom 216AFG PE 1 Threshold 273x3AFG or per details PE 1 Frame Harness QC-C3000P M 1 Door Harness QC-C_P M 1 Card Reader By security contractor OT 1 Power Supply AQL By security contractor SU Notes: Door normally closed and locked.1 Exterior access by presenting valid credential to reader, momentarily releasing trim for entry. I Free egress at all times. I Electrified exit device is fail secure and remain locked during power loss or alarm state. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA Set: 2.0 Doors: 102 3 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt T4A3386xNRP US32D MK 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 630 SU 1 Fail Secure Lock 72 10XG71 LL US26D SA 1 Permanent Keyed Core Verify & match owners existing 626 BE 1 Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" CS US32D RO 1 Gasketing (Head) 2891AS PE 2 Gasketing (Jambs) 290AS PE 1 Door Bottom 216AFG PE 1 Threshold 273x3AFG or per details PE 1 Frame Harness QC-C3000P MK 1 Door Harness QC-C_P MK 1 Card Reader By security contractor OT 1 Power Supply AQL By security contractor SU 1 Latch Protector 325 US26D RO 2433000 Notes: Door normally closed and locked. I Exterior access by presenting a valid credential to reader, momentarily releasing trim for entry. I Free egress at all times. I Electrified lock is fail secure and stays locked during power loss or alarm state. Set: 3.0 Doors: 101 3 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Electrified Indicator Mortise Lock 1 Permanent Keyed Core 1 Surface Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Gasketing (Head) 2 Gasketing (Jambs) 1 Door Bottom 1 Threshold 1 Frame Harness 1 Door Harness 1 Card Reader 1 Power Supply 1 Coat Hook T4A3386xN RP EL-CEPT LB V21 72 PHR NAC-82281 LNL Verify & match owners existing 351 CPS K1050 10" CS 2891 AS 290AS 216AFG 273x3AFG or per details QC-C3000P QC-C P By security contractor AQL By security contractor 796 US32D 630 US32D 626 EN US32D US26D MK SU SA BE SA RO PE PE PE PE MK MK OT SU RO Notes: Door normally closed and locked. I Exterior access by presenting a valid credential to reader, momentarily releasing trim for entry. I Engaging the deadbolt disables remote access control unlocking or scheduled unlock. I Free egress at all times. I Electrified lock is fail secure and stays locked during power loss or alarm state. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 RENTON WORLD LEGACY SQUARE - PHASE II RENTON, WA Set: 4.0 Doors: 100A, 100B 1 Hardware By door manufacturer OT END OF SECTION 087100 2433000 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 09 21 16 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide gypsum board assemblies as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Grid suspension system. C. Samples: 1. Trim Accessories: 12 inch lengths of trim other than edge beads and control joints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittals: 1. Nonstructural metal framing, for deflection limits under horizontal loading. Indicate the following for each partition type and height: a. Stud size. b. Stud thickness. C. Spacing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: ASTM C840. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING - GENERAL A. Framing Members and Components, General: AISI S220. 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A653/A653M, G40, hot dip galvanized. EQ coatings following AISI S220 that have ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are acceptable. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backing Units, GWB: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Thickness: 5/8 in. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. Performance Requirements: C1010 Partitions. B. Delegate stud framing to manufacturer licensed Professional Engineer. C. Structural Design Criteria: 1. Horizontal Partition Load: 5 psf. 2. Partition Horizontal Deflection Limits: a. Tile and Stone Finished Partitions: 1/360 of wall height. b. Other Partitions: 1/240 of wall height. D. Fire Resistance: Assemblies tested perASTM E119. 1. Fire Ratings: See Drawings. 2.4 FIRESTOPPING COMPONENTS A. Wall Head Joint Firestopping: Section 07 84 00. B. Firestop Track: One of the following types. 1. Top track manufactured to accommodate structural deflection while maintaining fire resistance rated assembly continuity. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) CEMCO FAS-Track. 2) ClarkDietrich BlazeFrame DL 2. 3) Fire Trak Corp Fire Trak System. 4) Marino\Ware FAS-Track. 5) Metal-Lite The System. 6) Or approved equal. 2. Intumescent Firestop Seal: One piece, preformed foam seal fitting over top tracks. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Hilti, Inc. Model CFS-TTS, Firestop Top Track Seal. 2) Specified Technologies Inc Track Top Gasket. 3) Or approved equal. b. Width: Accommodating track depth. 2.5 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS A. Framing Installation: 1. Anchors: Framing manufacturer recommended types for substrates. 2. Fasteners: ASTM C1002; Type S or GA-216; length to suit application. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, zinc coated, 0.062 inch diameter, minimum. 4. Acoustic Gaskets: Closed cell foam self-adhesive strips allowing fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick minimum, widths to match stud sizes. 5. Exterior Wall Isolation Strips: a. Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I, #15 asphalt felt, nonperforated. b. Foam Gaskets: Adhesive backed, close -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, stud -appropriate width. B. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 1. terial: Galvanized or aluminum coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized -steel sheet. 2. Shapes: Cornerbead, U-Bead, LC -bead, L-Bead, and Expansion (control) joint. C. Acoustic Sealant: ASTM C834; Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. Coordinate with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" requirements. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Accumetric LLC BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Construction Sealants RCS20. C. abber Construction Products Acoustical Sealant GSC. d. Hilti, Inc. CS-S SA Light. e. Specified Technologies, Inc. Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. f. USG Corporation SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. g. approved equal. 2. Fire Rated Partitions: Acoustical sealant type required or permitted by fire resistance designs shown on Drawings. D. Electrical Box Pads: Moldable non curing one component, intumescent, fire rated material for through penetration fire stop systems and sound attenuation systems; self adhering; 1/8 inch thick, minimum. 1. nufacturers and Products: a. Kinetics Noise Control Fire -Rated Isobacker. b. Specified Technologies, Inc. SpecSeal Firestop Putty Pads. C. approved equal. E. Thermal Insulation: Section 07 21 00. F. Gypsum Board Fasteners: 1. Steel Framing 33 mils Thick and Less: ASTM C1002, Type S. 2. Steel Framing Greater than 33 mils Thick: ASTM C954. G. Tile Backer Board Fasteners: Board manufacturer standard, corrosion resistant steel. H. Laminating Adhesive: Recommended type for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET I. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. For panels attached to heavy gauge cold -formed metal framing use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. J. Joint Materials: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M. 1. Joint Tape: a. Interior Gypsum Board: Fiberglass mesh. 2. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. a. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. C. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type, all- purpose compound. d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 3. Tile Backer Board: Product recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 4. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Setting type taping compound and setting type, sandable topping compound. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough -in utilities in are proper locations. B. Examine panels for moisture and mold; discard damaged panels. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sprayed fireproofing to the extent required to install gypsum assemblies. Patch damaged fireproofing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Framing Standard: ASTM C754 and ASTM C840. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PARTITION FRAMING A. Framing to Structure: Extend partition framing to underside of structure. Attach ceiling track to structure. B. Framing Without Gypsum Board on Both Faces: Brace stud framing system rigid; attach bridging to prevent stud rotation. C. Orient stud flanges the same direction within wall assembly. D. Stud Spacing: 1. Tile Backer Applications: As required for deflection performance. E. Install backing where shown and where supporting wall mounted fixtures, furniture, equipment, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET or other construction. F. Fire Resistance Rated Partitions: Tested assembly requirements. G. Firestop Track: Tested assembly requirements. H. Acoustic Accessories and STC Rated Assemblies: Follow tested assembly requirements. 1. Acoustical Sealant Beads: ASTM C919. Close off sound flanking paths. 2. Electrical Box Seals: In addition to electrical box seals installed as fire rating components, also provide acoustic seals as follows: a. Install seals before installing gypsum board. b. Overlap front edge of box so that seals will be compressed around edges of box as gypsum panels are installed. 3. Sound Attenuation Blankets: a. Install after one side of gypsum is installed and mechanical and electrical Work is complete in framing spaces. b. Fit tight around cut openings and penetrations, and behind and around electrical and mechanical items. C. Pack around door and window frames, between jamb studs, in boxed headers, and in other voids. I. Deflection Accommodation: Where framing extends to overhead structure, install deflection top track systems to prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. J. Framed Openings: 1. See Drawings. 2. Headers: Install track on top of header for installation of cripple studs. K. Direct Furring: 1. Anchor furring channels spaced See Drawings to substrate. a. Exterior Walls: Install isolation strip between furring and exterior walls. L. Z-Furring: 1. Apply insulation per Section 07 21 00. Hold insulation in place with Z-furring members spaced at See Drawings centers, anchored to substrate. 3.5 INSTALLATION - FRAMING TOLERANCES A. Deviation from Indicated Position: 1/8 in. in 10 ft, maximum. B. Deviation from Plumb and Level: 1/8 in. in 12 ft, maximum. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ELECTRICAL BOX SEALS A. Install seals before installing gypsum board. B. Overlap front edge of box so that seals will be compressed around edges of box as gypsum panels are installed. C. Applications: In addition to electrical box seals installed as acoustic components, also provide fire rating seals as follows: 1. Electrical boxes in fire barriers, smoke barriers, and STC rated walls. 2. Electrical boxes at interior gypsum board faces of exterior walls. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.7 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Follow ASTM C840. 1. Fire Rated Partitions: Install per tested designs referenced on Drawings. 2. Acoustically Rated Partitions: Install per tested designs referenced on Drawings. B. Cementitious Backer Units: Follow ANSI Al08.11. 1. Locations: walls behind tile. C. Cut panels to fit obstructions and openings without tearing face paper or cracking core. D. Install panels with face side out with lightly butted joints. E. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. F. Locate panel ends over support framing. G. Fit panels to ducts, pipes, conduit, and other penetrations and obstructions with maximum 1/4 inch joints. H. Attach gypsum board to framing and to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. I. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. J. Isolate perimeter of non-loadbearing drywall partitions from structural members. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with edge bead. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. K. Single Layer Installation: 1. Install panels vertically with long edges on continuous supports. 2. Attach panels to framing with screws. L. Double Layer Installation: 1. Attach base layer to framing with screws. 2. fset second layer joints and attach panels with screws and adhesive. 3. At walls taller than 10 feet, install panels horizontally and provide control joints at floor lines. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Water -Exposed Products: Remove entire panels; do not cut and patch gypsum board. 3.9 CLEANING A. Remove spills, spatters, and misapplications of finishing materials as they occur. B. Repair other finish surfaces damaged during drywall operations. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from gypsum panel compounds, adhesives, and sealants. B. Protect finished gypsum panels from being marred from ongoing Work. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide non-structural metal framing as indicated. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate opening requirements with Division 08 "Openings" Sections. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold -Formed Steel Structural and Non -Structural Framing Members." B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For non-structural metal framing indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For Professional Engineer. D. Evaluation Reports: from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for the following: 1. For steel studs and tracks and firestop tracks. 2. For each ceiling suspension system, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineer Qualifications: Qualified professional engineer responsible for delegated design, licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B. Code -Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product -certification program of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association, the Certified Steel Stud Association or the Steel Framing Industry Association. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General, NSMF-1: Comply with AISI S220 for conditions indicated. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. Studs and Runners: Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Embossed Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Clip System: Clips for use in head -of -wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top slotted deflection track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated on Drawings in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. E. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: As indicated on Drawings. F. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection and span. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical/ single -leg. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. RC Deluxe Resilient Channel (RCSD) by Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC. b. RC1-XD by CEMCO. 3. Coordinate resilient furring channel requirements with sound -rated assembly indicated. 4. Application: Corridors, or as indicated on Drawings. 5. Where cabinets or blocking for heavy mounts occur on the resilient channel side of the wall, mount blocking using the following: a. PAC-RCB by PAC International, LLC. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET H. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge -type steel sheet with minimum uncoated - steel thickness of 0.0329 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. C. Resilient Clips: Molded rubber and galvanized steel sound isolation clips for separating gypsum board from partition framing. 1. nufacturer and Product: RSIC-1 by Pac International. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer; refer to Section 01 61 16 "Delegated Design Requirements" for requirements. B. Regional Materials: If available, provide steel manufactured and containing recycled raw materials recovered within 500-mile radius of Project Site. C. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load -bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM Ell by an independent testing agency. E. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. F. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 Ibf/sq. ft. G. Vertical Deflection: For ceiling joists, soffit framing and suspension systems, deflection limited to 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span. 1. Vertical Loading: 4 Ibf/sq. ft. a. Provide 10 Ibf/sq. ft. at ceilings indicated to have suspended items attached. H. Spacing: 1. All interior wall and partition framing shall be spaced as indicated on Drawings. No wall assembly scheduled for tile or level 5 gypsum board finishes shall exceed 16 inches o.c. maximum. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16-3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. II assemblies concealed to view by cabinet or casework may be 24 inches o.c. maximum except where any portion of the wall is to receive tile finishes. 3. At ceilings scheduled for level 5 finishes, framing shall be 16 inches o.c. maximum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754. 1. psum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 1. Provide cantilevered framing where both sides of joints are to be single -member spanned. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. ItilayerApplication: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16-4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance - rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to framing. 2. Weld or screw attach to structural framing, where permitted by Structural Engineer of Record. F. Z-Shaped Furring Members: Where indicated or required. 1. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, measured from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide tiling as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Additional Attendees: a. Concrete installer. b. Gypsum wallboard installer. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Tile and tile trim. 2. Mortar. 3. Grout. a. Provide initial selection color charts or Samples. 4. Membranes. 5. Metal trim. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Locations of tile and tile patterns. 2. Locations of control and expansion joints. C. Samples: 1. Tile: Full sized Samples of each type and color. 2. Metal Trim: 12 inch long section of each profile. 3. Assembly Samples: Tile mounted on rigid panel, joints grouted, 12 inches square, 4 tiles minimum. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Reports: Field instruction reports. TILING 09 30 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store tile and cementitious materials indoors, elevated above grade. 2. Prevent liquid materials from freezing. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Perform Work within following limitations. 1. Building enclosed and environmental systems maintaining design conditions for Owner occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. Glazed Porcelain Tile forWalls, T-1: ANSI A137.1. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Arizona Tile Konkrete Series; as basis of design. 2. Tile Size: 12 by 24 in. 3. Color: "Konkrete Bianco". 4. Grout Color: GR-1, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's range. 5. Finish: Architect selected. 6. Installation: Wainscot to 4ft. 7. Application: At all gender Restroom. 2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Trim Units: Coordinated with colors, sizes, and coursing of adjoining flat tile. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Wall Profile Trim: Schluter. a. Type: Jolly, model no. J 100 AE; as basis of design. b. Material: Satin anodized aluminum. C. Style: For 3/8 in. tile. 2. Cove Base Trim: Schluter. a. Type: Dilex-Ahka, model no. AHKA 100 AE; as basis of design. b. Material: Satin anodized aluminum. C. Style: For 3/8 in. radius cove. C. Shapes: 1. Base: Architect selected. 2. Wainscot Cap: Architect selected. 3. External Corners: Architect selected. 4. Internal Corners: Architect selected. 5. Towel bar supports. TILING 09 30 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2.3 GROUT MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: 1. Provide mortar and grout for each installation from single manufacturer. B. Grout, General: 1. Sanded Grout: Joints over 1/8 inch wide. 2. Unsanded Grout: Joints 1/8 inch and less. C. 100 Percent Solids Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer: a. ARDEX WA. b. Custom Building Products CEG Lite. C. Laticete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Kerapoxy CQ. e. Merkrete Pro Epoxy. f. Sika Tile 825 Epoxy Grout & Mortar. g. Or approved equal. 2. Colors: Architect selected. 2.4 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: See Section 07 92 00. 1. Color: Architect Selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive tile Work, are firm, dry, clean, free of incompatible coatings, and follow ANSI Al 08.01. 3.2 TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile and grout perANSI A108.1 through ANSI A108.10 requirements and TCNA Handbook recommendations. 1. Install trim. B. Lay out tile to minimize pieces less than half size. Locate cuts to be inconspicuous. C. Lay tile to patterns shown on Drawings. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. E. Place tile with joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. F. Joint Widths: Manufacturer recommended minimums. G. Form internal angles square and external angles square. H. Install ceramic accessories rigidly. I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. TILING 09 30 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON Install joint backing and joint sealer per Section 07 92 00. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes per Section 07 92 00. 3.3 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean tile and grout surfaces. Remove grout residue, smears and haze. B. Protect tile with kraft paper or other covering to prevent damage and wear. Prohibit foot and wheeled traffic for seven days, minimum, after grouting. END OF SECTION TILING 09 30 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide resilient flooring as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Resilient flooring products. 2. Resilient accessories. 3. Installation materials. 4. Initial selection color charts. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Sheet Flooring: Sheet layout and locations of seams in each area. 2. Special patterns. C. Product Schedule: Resilient flooring products. D. Samples: 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 12 by 12 inch Samples of each product. 2. Resilient Tile Flooring: Full sized Samples of each product. 3. Resilient Base: 12 inch length of each product. 4. Resilient Moldings: 12 inch length of each product. 5. Cap Strips: 12 inch Samples. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For resilient flooring. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store resilient flooring indoors and within ambient temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 2. Store resilient sheet flooring rolls upright. RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3. Store resilient tile flooring on flat surfaces. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Perform Work within following limitations. 1. Building enclosed and environmental systems maintaining design conditions for Owner occupancy. 2. Establish ambient conditions 48 hours, minimum before and maintain conditions during and 48 hours, minimum after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POURED -IN -PLACE RUBBER FLOORING A. MANUFACTURERS. 1. Manufacturers and Products: Robertson Recreational Surfaces TotTurf TPV Supreme; as basis of design. 2. Color: Architect selected. 3. Application: Placed at 3/4 in. recess at stage area floor. 2.2 RESILIENT BASE A. MANUFACTURERS. 1. Burke's Flooring, LLC. 2. Johnsonite, a Div. of Tarkett USA and Canada. 3. Roppe Corporation. 4. Or approved equal. B. Rubber Base, WB-1: ASTM F1861 Type TP. 1. Manufacturers and Products: Architect selected. 2. Profiles: Architect selected. 3. Heights: Architect selected. 4. Length: Architect selected. 5. Thickness: 0.125 in. 6. Inside Corners: Job formed. 7. Outside Corners: Preformed. 8. Colors: Architect selected. 9. Applications: At all gender Restroom and telecommunications areas. 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDINGS A. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. B. Rubber Transition Strips: 1. Resilient flooring edge for glue -down applications; reducer strip for resilient floor covering; joiner for tile and carpet; transition strips. 2. Manufacturers: a. Flexco. RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON b. Johnsonite, a Div. of Tarkett USA and Canada. C. Nora, a Div of Interface. d. Roppe Corporation. e. approved equal. 3. terial: Rubber. 4. Color: Architect selected. 5. Profiles: Architect selected. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: 1. Class I per ASTM E648 or NFPA253, Critical Radiant Flux Classification. B. Accessibility Requirements: Applicable provisions in Department of Justice publication 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and state accessibility code. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Patching and Leveling Materials: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Edge Strips: Rubber, as indicated; profiles shown on Drawings. 1. Colors: Architect selected. C. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. D. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. E. Integrated Sound Control Layer. 1. High density cross -linked polymer fibers. Same manufacturer as flooring. F. Adhesives: Flooring manufacturer recommended water resistant product. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L, maximum. G. Game Line and Marker Paint: Manufacturer provided or recommended product. 1. VOC Content: 150 g/L, maximum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete floors have cured 28 days, minimum. B. Moisture and Alkalinity Testing: Meet manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparing Concrete Substrates: Meet manufacturer's requirements. B. Wood Substrates: 1. Sand to remove ridges and high areas. 2. Vacuum clean. RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 3.3 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Lay out sheets to minimize number of seams and to avoid cross seams. B. Lay sheets parallel to room walls. C. Scribe and cut sheet to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures. D. Extend sheets into recesses and under equipment. E. Terminate sheet flooring at centerline of doors where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. F. Install sheets with full adhesive coverage. G. Roll sheets to eliminate entrapped air and ensure full adhesion. Hand roll seams on both sides. H. Form flush, watertight heat welded seams of uniform appearance. I. Install integral cove with support strip where sheets terminate on vertical surfaces. Install cap strip level on top edge. 1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. J. Install edge strips where sheets terminate against dissimilar flooring. Butt end seams tight. 3.4 BASE INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Form tight joints. 2. Align the tops of bases with adjacent units. 3. Ensure continuous contact between base and substrate. Fill voids between base and substrate with manufacturer recommended filler material. 4. Do not stretch base. B. Preformed Corners: Install formed pieces before straight pieces. C. Job Formed Corners: 1. tside Corners: Form bends without discoloration in corners. 2. Inside Corners: Cope. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive. B. Do not allow traffic on flooring until adhesives have fully set. C. Provide surface protection during construction period. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide painting and coating as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Sheen Levels: ASTM D523. a. Flat: Five gloss units at 60 degrees and 10 gloss units at 85 degrees, maximum. b. Eggshell: 10 to 25 gloss units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 gloss units at 85 degrees. C. Satin: 20 to 35 gloss units at 60 degrees and 35 gloss units minimum at 85 degrees. d. Semigloss: 35 to 70 gloss units at 60 degrees. e. Gloss: 70 gloss units at 60 degrees, minimum. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 2. Additional Agenda Items: a. Review moisture testing requirements and results. b. Review substrate preparation requirements and methods. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Draw Down Samples: Each type of paint system and each topcoat color and gloss. a. Label each Sample for paint type, location, and substrate. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: 1. Cleaning, touch up, and repair instructions for painted and coated surfaces. 2. Area summary with finish schedule and Samples, designating where each product, color and finish was used. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store paint products in sealed containers until ready for use. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply materials only when surface and ambient temperatures are within temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer. B. Apply exterior coatings when rain or snow are not occurring or forecasted, and when relative humidity is inside humidity ranges, and moisture content of surfaces is within acceptable levels required by paint product manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Colors by Basis of Design Manufacturer Designations: See Finish Material Legend or as indicated in Drawings. B. Products: Scheduled in this Section. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Paint Systems: Primers, intermediate coats and topcoats compatible with substrates and one another. B. Coatings: Ready mixed or field catalyzed. C. Preparation: 1. Mix to soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogenous coating. 2. Blend tints and catalyzers to uniform consistency and color, capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Testing: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials delivered to Project site or taken from Supplier facility. 2. Acceptance Criteria: Products follow specified requirements. B. Non -Conforming Work: Remove materials from substrates, pay for testing of replacement products, and repaint surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify substrates are ready to receive Work. B. Preinstallation Testing: Test moisture content of substrate does not exceed the following: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board: Verify that finishing compound is dried and sanded smooth. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET D. Plaster: Verify plaster is cured. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove electrical plates, hardware, trim, escutcheons, and fittings. Correct defects in substrates capable of affecting Work. B. Cleaning: Remove substances that could impair paint bond, including dust, oil, grease, and incompatible coatings. 1. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with cleaning solution recommended by finish coating manufacturer. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 2. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer. 3. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 4. Plaster Surfaces: Fill cracks, holes, and other imperfections with latex patching plaster. Blend texture with adjacent surfaces. Clean and allow to dry. 5. Non-Passivated Galvanized Surfaces: Smooth and hand or power tool clean per ASTM D6386. 6. Passivated Galvanized Surfaces: Remove soluble and insoluble contaminants and corrosion. Sweep blast per ASTM D6386 to achieve uniform 1.0 to 2.0 mil anchor profile. 7. Uncoated Steel: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean per SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning or as required by manufacturer for substrate and conditions. 8. Primed Steel: Clean field welds, fasteners, and abraded shop primer. 9. Wood Surfaces: a. Wipe off dust and grit. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried. b. Backprime concealed surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Follow manufacturer instructions for application method, thickness of coatings, and number of coats. 1. Apply finishes when surfaces are dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. 2. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat. 3. Apply coatings to uniform appearance. 4. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats. 5. Leave testing agency, equipment identification, and performance labels unpainted. B. Appearance: 1. Apply paints without imperfections. 2. Edges and Color Breaks: Produce sharp edges. 3.4 PAINTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint the following equipment when exposed in occupied spaces and exterior areas: 1. Electrical panelboards and switchgear. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2. Piping. 3. Ductwork. 4. Pipe hangers. 5. Conduit. 6. Shop -primed equipment. B. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts visible through grilles with one coat of flat black paint. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Engage inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to Work areas. 1. Failed Test Retest Cost: Contractor responsibility. B. Testing: Dry film thickness. C. Non -Conforming Work: Remove and replace or apply additional coats, and retest. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials. B. Remove splattered paints. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect painted surfaces from subsequent Work. Touch up and restore damaged painted surfaces. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Walls: 1. Latex Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer N534. b. PPG Paints: SPEEDHIDE zero Interior Latex Sealer 6-4900XI. C. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W02600. 2. Acrylic Latex Enamel: Eggshell finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Series. b. PPG Paints: SPEEDHIDE Zero Interior Latex. C. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex. B. Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. Latex Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer N534. b. PPG Paints: SPEEDHIDE zero Interior Latex Sealer 6-4900XI. C. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W02600. 2. Acrylic Latex Enamel: Flat finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Series. b. PPG Paints: SPEEDHIDE Zero Interior Latex. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET C. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex. C. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Pre Primed Metal: Touch up with same shop primer product used by manufacturer. 2. Latex Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer HPO4. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus DTM 4020PF. C. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-1310 Series. d. Tnemec: Series 115 UniBond DF. 3. Acrylic Latex Enamel: Semigloss finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP D.T.M Acrylic Enamel. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Enamel 4216 SG or 90 Series. C. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Acrylic. d. Tnemec: Series 1029 Enduratone low semigloss. D. Galvanized Steel: 1. Latex Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer HPO4. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus DTM 4020PF. C. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-1310 Series. d. Tnemec: Series 115 UniBond DF. 2. Acrylic Latex Enamel: Semigloss finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP D.T.M Acrylic Enamel. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus EP DTM. C. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Acrylic. d. Tnemec: Series 115 UniBond DF. 3.9 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Galvanized Steel: 1. Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic HP29. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus DTM Primer 4020PF. C. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer B66-1300 Series. d. Tnemec: Series 115 UniBond DF. 2. Latex Topcoat: Semigloss finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic HP29. b. PPG Paints: Pitt -Tech Plus EP DTM 90-1610. C. Sherwin-Williams: A-100 Series. d. Tnemec: Series 1029 Enduratone. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 5 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET B. W od at Exposed CLT Surfaces: 1. Sealer and Finish: a. End Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross -grain cuts and is compatible with specified finish coating. b. Preparation: Scuff sand (150 grit) the surface to clean, reduce surface tension and create adherence characteristics prior to finishing. C. Shop -Applied Protective Coating: 1) Basis -of -Design Product: KP-12 UVW by Sansin Corp.; www.sansin.com. 2) Process: Apply ONE coat on panel faces, all penetrations, holes, openings, and perimeter edges of panels. 3) Applications: a) All surfaces of CLT panels. b) All surfaces of glue -laminated members. c) All surfaces of wood cladding at doors. d. Field -Applied Final Finish Coatings: 1) Basis -of -Design Products: a) Intermediate Coat: PC SDF CC# 241104SDF-1 (25 percent tinted) by Sansin Corp.; www.sansin.com. b) Topcoat: ENS Optimum Clear Satin CC# 250130ENS-2 (25 percent reduced tint) by Sansin Corp.; www.sansin.com 2) Process: a) At Exposed Wood Surfaces at Interior of Performance Space: Apply ONE intermediate coat and ONE topcoat on panel faces, all penetrations, holes, openings, and perimeter edges of panels. b) At Exterior Exposed Wood Surfaces: Apply ONE intermediate coat and TW topcoats on panel faces, all penetrations, holes, openings, and perimeter edges of panels. 3) Applications: a) All exposed surfaces of CLT panels. b) All exposed surfaces of glue -laminated members. c) All exposed surfaces of wood cladding at doors. 3.10 HIGH PERFORMANCE EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Exterior Non -Galvanized Ferrous Metal, Contractor's Option 1: Pigmented fluoropolymer over aliphatic urethane, zinc rich primer, and high build epoxy system. 1. Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer: a. PPG Paints: Dimetcote 9. b. Sherwin-Williams Zinc Clad Il. C. Tnemec Series 90E-92 Tneme-Zinc. 2. High Build Epoxy Second Coat: PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 6 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET a. PPG Paints: Amerlock 600. b. Sherwin-Williams: Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy. C. Tnemec: Series N69 High Build Epoxoline II. 3. Aliphatic Urethane Third Coat: a. PPG Paints: Pitthane Ultra. b. Sherwin-Williams: Acrolon Ultra. C. Tnemec: Series 1074 Endura-Shield II. 4. Two Component Fluoropolymer Topcoat: Gloss finish. a. PPG Paints: Coraflon ADS. b. Sherwin-Williams: FluoroKem HS 100. C. Tnemec: Series 1070V Fluoronar. 5. Applications: Exterior non -galvanized ferrous metal, except weathering steel (Corten) materials. B. Exterior Non -Galvanized Ferrous Metal, Contractor's Option 2: Pigmented polyurethane over high build epoxy system. 1. Epoxy Primer: a. Benjamin Moore: Corotech Surface Tolerant Epoxy Mastic, V160. b. PPG Paints: Amerlock 600. C. Sherwin-Williams: Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy. d. Tnemec: Series N69 High Build Epoxoline II. 2. Two Component Polyurethane Topcoat: Gloss finish. a. Benjamin Moore: Corotech Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane. b. PPG Paints: Pitthane Ultra. C. Sherwin-Williams: Hi -Solids Polyurethane B65-300. d. Tnemec: Series 1074 Endura-Shield II. 3. Applications: Exterior non -galvanized ferrous metal, except weathering steel (Corten) materials. END OF SECTION PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 7 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 10 14 23 - PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide panel signage as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Each type of sign. 2. Initial Selection: Sign styles, color charts, and character styles and character colors. B. Shop Drawings: Sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Schedule: Locations of each sign type, description of graphics, and message text. D. Samples: Each sign type. Acceptable Samples may be installed in the Work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs labeled in name groups. B. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Perform Work within following limitations: 1. Building enclosed and environmental systems maintaining design conditions for Owner occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR ROOM IDENTIFICATION AND CODE -REQUIRED SIGNS A. Room Identification and Code -Required Signs: Raised character acrylic plastic signs. 1. Dimensional Letter Signs Manufacturers: a. Cosco Industries. PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET b. FastSigns International, Inc. C. InPro Architectural Products. d. Or approved equal. 2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Sizes, Shapes: See Drawings. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Character Style: Architect selected ADA compliant characters. 6. Character Case: Upper case only. 7. Colors: Architect selected. 8. Metal: Raised Aluminum. 9. Graphics: Owner will supply electronic files and color requirements for sign graphics. 10. Mounting: Double side foam -core adhesive tape. 2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Accessibility Requirements: Applicable provisions in Department of Justice publication 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, ICC/ANSI A117.1, or state accessibility code. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Adhesive Tape: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. B. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other noncorroding metal. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble signs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates to ensure secure adhesive mounting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install signs after doors and wall surfaces are finished. B. Follow accessibility requirements. C. Install signs plumb and level. D. Install signs with adhesive to lay flat against wall. E. Clean signs after installation. 3.3 SIGN LOCATIONS A. Locate room identification signs on wall surfaces adjacent to strike side of door, 5 feet above finished floor to center line of sign and 3 inches from doorjamb trim. PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Locate unit entry identification signs on wall surfaces adjacent to strike side of door, 5 feet above finished floor to center line of sign and 3 inches from doorjamb trim. C. Locate informational signs on wall surfaces, 5 feet above finished floor to center line of sign at scheduled locations. END OF SECTION PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide wall and door protection as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate installation of wall mounted products with concealed blocking and anchors. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Show physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show locations, extent, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: 1. Linear Corner Guards: Full sized sections, 12 inches long. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Impact resistant plastic. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wall and door protection, describing cleaning and repair procedures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Perform Work within following limitations. 1. Building enclosed and environmental systems maintaining design conditions for Owner occupancy. 2. Temperature: Maintain 70 degrees F for 72 hours, minimum, before installation. B. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. WALLAND DOOR PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 1.8 WARRANTY A. nufacturer Warranty: 1. Impact Resistant Wall Units: Warrant against product failure. a. Failure includes structural failures, deterioration of plastic and other material under normal use. b. rranty Period: Lifetime. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface Mounted Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed stainless steel with formed edges; turn to match wall condition. 1. nufacturers: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. InPro Corporation. C. Korogard. d. Nystrom, Inc. e. approved equal. 2. Configuration: a. Dimensions: 48 in. x 2 in. x 2 in. b. Thickness: 16 Ga. C. ng Size: Match existing. d. Corner Angle: 90 degrees. e. Installation: Adhesive. f. Applications: See Drawings. 3. Stainless Steel Finish: Type 304, brushed satin finish with rounded edges and protective coating. Pre -drilled for stainless steel screw fasteners.. 4. Applications: At all outside corners. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M. B. Adhesives: Manufacturer recommended products. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L, maximum. C. Fasteners: Type, size, and material to suit each application. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. B. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. C. Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns. WALLAND DOOR PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 2.4 FINISHES A. Protect metal finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 directional polish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify wall conditions follow manufacturer recommendations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall and door protection plumb and level. B. Mounting Height from Finished Floor: 1. Corner Guards: See Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean Work after installation. Remove excess adhesive. END OF SECTION WALLAND DOOR PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 10 28 00 - RESTROOM ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide restroom accessories as indicated. SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate size and location of wall backing for support of accessories. B. Preinstallation Meeting Attendees and Procedures: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Each accessory type. 2. Initial selection color charts. 3. Powered Accessories: Submit electrical characteristics. B. Schedules: List product types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations. Use room numbers and accessory numbers in schedule. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric powered accessories. B. Warranty Documentation: For restroom accessories. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: Manufacturer recommended parts and quantities. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify field measurements before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Product: Warrant against product and installation failure. a. W rranty Period: 5 years. RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC USE RESTROOM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories, General: Provide accessories from single source,from single manufacturer. 1. Accessories with Locking Panels: Tumbler cam locks; all accessories keyed alike. B. MANUFACTURERS 1. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; www.bobrick.com. 2. Other Approved Manufacturers: a. American Specialties, Inc.; www.americanspecialties.com. b. Bradley Company, LLC; www.bradleycorp.com. C. Or approved equal. C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Dual roll in reserve type. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick Model no. B-2888, as basis of design. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Material and Finish: #4 Stainless steel or with satin finish. D. Soap Dispensers: Surface -mounted, manual operation. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick ConturaSeries Model no. B-4112, as basis of design. 2. Material and Finish: #4 Stainless steel and with satin finish. E. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick ClassicSeries Model no. B-221, as basis of design. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Capacity: 250 covers, minimum. 4. Material and Finish: #4 Stainless steel with satin finish or #4 Stainless steel with matte black. F. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: C-folded towel type. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick ClassicSeries Model no. B-3699, as basis of design. 2. Mounting: Surface -mounted. 3. Disposal Capacity: 2 gallons, minimum. 4. Material and Finish:#4 Stainless steel with satin finish. G. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick ConturaSeries Model no. B-270, as basis of design. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Material and Finish: #4 Stainless steel with satin finish. RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET 2.2 PERFORMANCE A. Accessibility Requirements: Applicable provisions in Department of Justice publication 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and state accessibility code. B. Electrical Components: 1. UL Listed and labeled. 2. Sound Pressure Level: 65 to 75 dBA range, maximum, measured 3 feet from sound source. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch-minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS; cold rolled, commercial steel, 0.036 inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G60 hot dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM Al53/A153M, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices, same material as accessory. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Tamper resistant. F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Accessories, General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. ind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate sheet metal of seamless sheets with flat surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify backing supports are in place and adequate. B. Powered Accessories: Verify electrical power is correctly located and is of proper characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories level, plumb, and firmly anchored. B. Install using fasteners appropriate to substrate. C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand 250 Ibf minimum load, when tested per ASTM F446. D. Powered Accessories: See Division 26 for wiring requirements. E. Battery Powered Accessories: Install fresh batteries before Substantial Completion. RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET A. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings using methods acceptable to the manufacturer. B. Touchup, repair or replace damaged products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 4 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Results: 1. Provide fire protection specialties as indicated. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination Procedures: 1. Coordinate Work results of this Section with other Work. B. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. Conduct meeting at Project site one month, minimum, before starting Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Initial selection color Samples and finish. 2. Extinguisher operational features. 3. Bracket type. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Show cabinet dimensions, details, fire ratings, and wall bracket mounting. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver fire protection specialties in manufacturers undamaged packaging. 2. Obtain bill of lading. Verify delivery is complete and products are undamaged. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Fire Extinguishers: Warrant against product failure. a. Failure includes material and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers, General: 1. Fire Extinguisher Fabrication and Labeling: NFPA 10. 2. FM Global approved. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 1 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical: 1. Manufacturer and Product: a. J.L. Industries Cosmic 5E, as basis of design. b. Amerex Model B424. C. Larsen's Manufacturing Company MPS. d. Potter Roemer 3005. e. Or approved equal. 2. UL Rating: 2A:10-B:C. 3. Nominal Capacity: 5 pounds. 4. Container: Enameled steel container with chrome plated brass valve. 5. Application: As indicated in Drawings. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: 1. Nonrated. 2. 1 hour fire rated. 3. 2 hour fire rated. B. Flush Framed Door Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. J.L. Industries, as basis of design. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company 2409 Series. C. Potter -Roemer Alta 7000 Series. d. Safety One Industries Murano Series. e. Product and model as selected by Architect. 2. Cabinet: Cold rolled steel, sized for extinguisher; recessed or semi-recessedtype. 3. Door: Steel, powder coated, manufacturer's standard thickness. 4. Frames: Hollow metal. 5. Glazing: None. 6. Hardware: Piano hinge. 7. Trim: Material to match door, rolled edge, depth to suit mounting conditions. 8. Application: As indicated in Drawings. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. Fire Resistance: 1. Fire Rated Extinguisher Cabinets: ASTM E814; match rating of walls where installed. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled steel, ASTM A1008. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 2 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 minimum strength and durability. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication: Provide cabinets with trim, frame, door, and hardware. 2.6 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing Methods: Follow NAAMM AMP 500. B. Anodizing: AAMA 611 Class I or AAMA 612 with electrodeposition organic seal. 1. Color: Architect selected.. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Steel, red enamel finish, sized for specified fire extinguishers. B. Cabinet Signs: 1. Lettering: Architect selected. 2. Arrangement: Architect selected. 3. Color: Architect selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Installer List. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify rough openings and blocking for cabinets are correctly sized and located. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. General: NFPA 10. B. Secure cabinets in place. C. Place extinguishers in cabinets. D. Apply signage. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 3 LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 PERMIT/ BID SET LEGACY SQUARE PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON PERMIT/ BID SET SEPTEMBER 8, 2025 M I T H U N